HomeMy WebLinkAboutB12-0309 VOLUME 2 CONTRACTS & SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL
Contract Documents and Specifications
For
Fire Station 2 Renovation
42 West Meadow Drive, Vail, CO
TOWN OF VAIL
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS/TRANSPORTATION
1309 Elkhorn Drive
Vail, Colorado 81657
16 July 2012
Table of Contents
VOLUME 1
Invitation to Bid and Bid Forms
Invitation for Bid
Instruction to Bidders
Bid Form
Bid Schedule
Measurement & Payment
Bidders Qualification Statement
Certificate Regarding Employment Of Illegal Aliens
Bid Bond
Notice of Award
Contract Forms
Construction Contract
Certificate of Insurance Verification
Payment and Performance Bond
Notice to Proceed
Change Order
Substantial Completion Form
Certificate of Final Payment
Final Acceptance Form
General Conditions
Technical Specifications
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
Note: All references to Division 1 or General Conditions refer
to the General Conditions within the Contract Forms
01210 ALLOWANCES
01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING
01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02080 PIPED UTILITIES – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
02230 SITE CLEARING
02240 DEWATERING
02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
02300 EARTHWORK
02370 EROSION CONTROL
02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION
02530 SANITARY SEWERAGE
02552 GROUND-LOOP, HEAT-PUMP PIPING
02620 SUBDRAINAGE
02630 STORM DRAINAGE
02732 ROADWAY BASE
02741 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02764 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
02780 UNIT PAVERS
02920 LAWNS AND GRASSES
02930 EXTERIOR PLANTS
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03532 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-
DIVISION 05 – METALS
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05511 METAL STAIRS
05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07131 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
07210 BUILDING INSULATION
07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES
07411 METAL SHINGLE ROOFING
07460 FIBER CEMENT SIDING
07610 METAL ROOF PANELS
07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING
07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES
07920 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
08111 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08311 ACCESS DOORS
08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
08411 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT
08550 WOOD WINDOWS
08710 DOOR HARDWARE
08800 GLAZING
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09260 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLIES
09912 PAINTING
09931 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN
DIVISION 10 – BUILDING SPECIALTIES
10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS
10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
VOLUME 2
DIVISION 15 – FIRE PROTECTION/MECHANICAL
15300 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
DIVISION 16 – FIRE ALARM/ELECTRICAL
16721 FIRE ALARM
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING
220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING
220519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220533 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220548 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220700 PLUMBING INSULATION
221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL
230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
230516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC
230519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
230548 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230700 HVAC INSULATION
230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
231123 NATURAL GAS PIPING
232113 HYDRONIC PIPING
232123 HYDRNIC PUMPS
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
233113 METAL DUCTS
233300 DUCT ACCESSORIES
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
235216 CONDENSING BOILERS
235523 GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS
235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
236313 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
266423 SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
238219 FAN COIL UNITS
238316 RADIANT HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING
238316 SNOWMELT
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260523 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262413 SWITCHBOARDS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262713 ELECTRICITY METERING
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262813 FUSES
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
263213 ENGINE GENERATORS
263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES
264313 TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Construction Drawings (As Attached By Reference)
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 15300: FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnishing of labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for the
complete installation and testing, adjusting, and placing into service of the
fire protection systems as specified herein and as required by Vail Fire &
Emergency Services.
B. The scope of work included in this specification is:
1. Wet pipe sprinkler system, per NFPA 13, throughout building.
2. Construction of new fire protection water entry sized to adequately
support new fire protection system. Existing water supply is from
a 1-1/2” entry. System must be hydraulically proven.
3. Exterior sprinkler coverage, as specified herein, for each balcony,
through sidewall mounted, dry sprinkler head.
4. Attic and roof overframe sprinklers, through an antifreeze loop or
dry system.
5. Installation of training standpipe in equipment bay, to be
coordinated with Vail Fire & Emergency Services.
C. Work included in this specification shall consist of, but is not necessarily
limited to, the following items:
1. Obtain and bear the cost of necessary permits, bonds, and fees.
2. Installation of a complete, operable and code compliant fire
sprinkler system.
3. Furnish and install waterflow and tamper switches. Coordinate
locations and monitoring with fire alarm contractor. Outside
horn/strobe to be provided by fire alarm contractor.
4. Complete required cutting and patching.
5. Include miscellaneous items as specified.
D. Water supply data may be obtained from Eagle River Water & Sanitation.
Fire Protection Contractor is responsible for verifying all field pressures
prior to construction.
E. The complete installation shall be in compliance all applicable codes and
standards referenced herein.
F. Fire protection contractor shall be properly licensed in the Town of Vail.
G. Coordinate work with other trades, building conditions and structural
conditions prior to installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15300 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Three sets of shop drawings, equipment submittals & hydraulic
calculations shall be submitted to the project Fire Protection Engineer for
review prior to commencement of construction. Submittal shall include
product data for each type sprinkler head, valve, pipe, fittings, fire
department connection, system accessories and miscellaneous
equipment. Shop Drawings shall be prepared in accordance with NFPA
13 including hydraulic calculations.
B. Submit 3 sets of submittals, drawings and calculations to the Vail Fire&
Emergency Services plan review office, along with appropriate permit
applications.
1.3 SITE DOCUMENTATION
A. Maintain at the site one record set of drawings, specifications, accepted
shop drawings and accepted submittals. Upon project completion,
provide a complete set of reproducible as-built drawings to the owner.
1.4 REFERENCES /APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
C. Vail Fire & Emergency Services Standards
D. Town of Vail Municipal Code
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13
F. International Building Code (IBC) 2009
G. International Fire Code (IFC) 2009
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System shall be a complete, operable and code compliant fire sprinkler
system in compliance with all applicable requirements.
B. Equipment, accessories, and products shall be:
1. UL Listed
2. Manufactured according to the latest standards, methods,
techniques, and codes applicable at the time of bidding.
3. The product of experienced manufacturers, new and free from
defects in manufacture or performance.
4. Each system component shall be installed in according to
manufacturer's recommendations for the specific service
conditions.
5. Permanently marked with manufacturer's identification showing (if
applicable):
a) Manufacturer
b) Capacity
c) Service rating
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15300 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
d) Type, grade, or class of each item
e) Certification or approval
1.6 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
A. The fire protection contractor is responsible without reservation for their
design and for cooperation and coordination with the design direction
established by the Fire Protection Engineer.
B. Any areas of disagreement must be resolved prior to commencing any
work or ordering of materials. The system must be reviewed satisfactorily
by the AHJ, all applicable agencies and owner’s representative.
C. Any contractor submitting a proposal for the fire protection systems
accepts total responsibility for their systems both in their performance as
stated above and herein and for their adequate protection from any
damage and for the resulting damage from failure of their system due to
freezing.
1.7 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Fire Protection Contractor shall conduct a water flow test or obtain proper
water model data, prior to completion of submittal drawings. Water
supply data shall be included in submittal package.
B. System shall be designed per NFPA 13.
C. All equipment used in the system shall be UL listed.
D. Sprinkler system shall be wet pipe in all conditioned areas. In areas
subject to freezing, an antifreeze loop shall be provided or dry heads shall
be installed.
E. The existing water supply into building shall be upsized to accommodate
new system demand. The entire system shall be hydraulically calculated.
F. Training standpipe shall be coordinated with Vail Fire & Emergency
Services.
PART 2 EQUIPMENT/MANUFACTURERS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Contractor shall choose equipment manufacturer, provided all
specification requirements are met. All equipment is subject to approval
by Fire Protection Engineer and Vail Fire & Emergency Services.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15300 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Steel Piping and Fittings: Per ASTM, ANSI standards; Schedule 40 or
equivalent, UL listed for fire protection systems. CPVC piping is not
allowed.
B. Provide fittings, couplings, unions and other piping accessories as
necessary. All equipment shall be UL listed for fire protection systems
and supplied in accordance with NFPA 13 and other applicable
standards.
C. Provide valves of the size and type appropriate for use in the fire
protection system as specified herein. All valves shall be UL listed for
their use and supplied in accordance with NFPA 13 and other applicable
standards. All valves shall be new.
D. Sprinkler Heads: Provide UL listed sprinkler heads, upright, pendent or
sidewall type. Indicate each type and location on submittal plans.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Employ on the job a competent superintendent for the progress and
execution of the work. Labor quality shall be of high standards,
conforming to standard practice as stipulated by NFPA, ASTM, and ANSI
recommendations, by skilled personnel.
B. Contractor's Qualifications: Any installation, modification, or alteration of a
sprinkler system shall be performed only by a person qualified to do so,
as defined by the state and local regulations.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the work of other
trades, the building and property of others due to leaks or defects in the
fire protection system, piping and equipment. Contractor shall pay for
necessary replacement or repair of work or items damaged due to the fire
protection system.
3.2 TESTS
A. Cleaning: Before conducting any tests, flush clean the complete system
to remove dirt and debris.
B. Flow Test: At start of project, fire protection contractor shall be
responsible for conducting site flow test. Include flow test data in project
submittal.
C. System tests: Conduct all required tests, as regulated by Vail Fire &
Emergency Services.
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15300 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15300 - 5
D. Hydrostatic test: The fire protection piping shall be tested under
hydrostatic pressure of not less than 200 pounds psig for a duration of not
less than 2 hours with no drop in pressure.
END OF SECTION
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 16721: FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section covers the fire alarm system, including initiating devices,
notification appliances, auxiliary controls, and supervisory devices.
1.2 This section includes the furnishing of labor, equipment, and materials for
installation of the fire alarm system as specified herein.
1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract.
B. The system and all associated operations shall be in accordance with the
following:
1. International Building Code (2009 edition)
2. International Fire Code (2009 edition)
3. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code (2010 edition)
4. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (2011 edition)
5. Town of Vail Municipal Code
6. Vail Fire & Emergency Services Standards
1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Contractor is responsible for providing a compliant system in accordance
with all applicable standards.
B. System shall be designed with the following criteria:
1. Provide an addressable fire alarm control panel. All required
clearances (3’) must be maintained. The FACP shall be located in
a dry, clean, heated location. Refer to Fire Alarm plans for FACP
location.
2. Occupant notification shall be through horns and strobes.
3. Manual pull stations shall be provided at all exits.
4. Full coverage smoke and heat detection is required. Provide
smoke detectors with sounder bases in resident areas.
5. Provide addressable modules for supervision of sprinkler system
and interface to HVAC system.
6. Provide monitored carbon monoxide detectors as required by Vail
Fire & Emergency Services.
7. Wiring shall be in conduit in Bay areas. Wire may be free run in
other areas. Wire shall be properly supported.
C. Refer to Fire Alarm drawings for system device layout.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide a complete, noncoded, addressable, microprocessor-
based fire alarm system with initiating devices, notification appliances,
and monitoring and control devices as specified herein.
B. Wiring/Signal Transmission:
1. Transmission shall be addressable signal transmission, dedicated
to fire alarm service only.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. System connections for initiating (signaling) circuits and
notification appliance circuits shall be Class B.
3. Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble
signal at the FACP. Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone
and alphanumeric annunciation.
C. Audible Alarm Notification: By horns throughout the building, in
accordance with the audibility requirements of NFPA 72.
D. Visual Alarm Notification: By strobes in corridors, common areas,
restrooms, sleeping rooms.
E. Power Requirements
1. Primary: The control unit shall receive 120 VAC power via a
dedicated fused disconnect circuit. The incoming power to the
system shall be supervised so that any power failure will be
indicated at the control unit. A green "power on" LED shall be
displayed continuously while incoming power is present.
2. Secondary: The system shall be provided with sufficient battery
capacity per NFPA 72.
3. Provide sufficient power supplies, either at the FACP or remotely,
to accommodate system requirements.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following to Fire Protection Engineer:
1. Product data sheets for system components, illustrating UL listing
of each device.
2. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer.
3. Shop drawings showing system details including location of
FACP, all devices and circuiting.
4. System description including circuit supervision, auxiliary controls
and sequence of operations.
5. Operating and Maintenance Manual: Provide data for each
product, including all features and operating sequences. Provide
the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service
organizations.
6. Product certification signed by the manufacturer of system
components.
7. System test records.
B. Submission to Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Submit to the AHJ
copies of submittals as described in item A. Fire alarm contractor is
responsible for obtaining and paying for the fire alarm permit.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A factory authorized installer is to perform the
work of this section. The installation must be supervised or performed by
a minimum of a NICET level II technician.
B. All equipment shall be UL (Underwriter’s Laboratory) Listed
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Notifier
B. EST
C. Firelite
D. Equivalent. Submit to Fire Protection Engineer for approval.
2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A. General: Provide an addressable, UL listed FACP capable of supporting
the required devices and a 20% spare capacity. Panel shall have an LCD
display.
2.3 MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A. Description: Double-action type, red LEXAN or metal, with white raised-
letter operating instructions. Station will mechanically latch upon
operation and remain so until manually reset with a key common with the
control units.
2.4 SMOKE SENSORS
A. General: Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective
Signaling Systems." Device shall consist of a permanent base and a plug
in sensor. Detectors shall be self-restoring, intelligent and analog.
B. Type: Smoke sensors shall be of the photoelectric type. Ionization type
sensors may not be used.
C. Duct Smoke Detector: Photoelectric type, with sampling tube of design
and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer. Detector includes
relay as required for fan shutdown. Each duct detector shall have a
Remote Test Station with an alarm LED and test switch. Ionization
detectors may not be used.
2.5 HEAT DETECTORS
A. Thermal Sensor: Combination fixed-temperature and rate-of-rise unit with
plug-in base and alarm indication lamp; 135-deg F fixed-temperature
setting except as indicated.
2.6 ALARM-NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Fire Alarm Horns: Electric-vibrating polarized type, operating on 24-VDC.
Audible alarm level shall be 75db throughout or 15 db above ambient, per
NFPA 72.
B. Visual Notification Appliances: Multi candela output, 24 VDC operation,
wall mounted with "FIRE" printed vertically. Strobes shall be provided in
candela as needed to comply with NFPA 72.
C. Audible/Visual Units: Combination notification appliances consist of
factory-combined, audible and visual notification units in a single
mounting assembly.
2.7 ADDRESSABLE MODULES
A. Monitor or control one or more system components that are not otherwise
equipped for addressable communication.
B. Modules will be capable of mounting in a standard electrical box and will
include cover plates to allow surface or flush mounting.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 - 4
C. Modules will receive their operating power from the signaling line or a
separate two wire pair running from an appropriate power supply as
required.
D. The Module shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control
unit. Module identification shall be transmitted to the control unit for
processing according to the program instructions.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install system components and all associated devices in accordance with
applicable NFPA Standards and manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein
and as shown on the plans. Include sufficient equipment, wiring,
terminations, electrical boxes, and all other necessary material for a
complete, operating system.
B. Exterior Horn/Strobe: Fire alarm contractor is responsible for furnishing
and installaing the exterior horn/strobe above the fire department
connection.
C. Water-Flow and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler
valve required to be supervised.
3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. System Wiring: Wire and cable shall be a type listed for its intended use
and shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70: National Electric
Code (NEC).
B. Raceways/Conduit: Wiring in Bay area shall be in conduit.
C. Color Coding/Labels: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from
the normal building power wiring. Label all circuits. Paint fire alarm
system junction boxes and covers red.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized
representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of
components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.
B. System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in
NFPA 72 and per the requirements of the local fire department.
C. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections,
tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log.
D. Final Test, Certificate of Completion, and Certificate of Occupancy: Test
the system as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in order to
obtain a certificate of occupancy.
END OF SECTION
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500-1
SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8. Concrete bases.
9. Supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe
chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces,
crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and plumbing equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples
include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Plumbing Fixtures to the architect.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500-2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved
and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics
may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical
services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings
or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum
thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C. Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint,
plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500-3
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum
working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number
required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and
integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit
around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500-4
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
2.7 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,
and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500-5
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.
Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free
solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,
using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500-6
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading
is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding
operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials
of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written
instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base,
and anchor into structural concrete floor.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500-7
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing
materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.8 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base
plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 220500
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING 220513-1
SECTION 220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal,
small and medium, pump motors for use on ac power systems up to120 V and installed at equipment
manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 8,150 feet above sea
level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and
without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING 220513-2
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H. Insulation: Class F.
I. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame
sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of
specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when
winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.
Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION 220513
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING 220516-1
SECTION 220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal-bellows expansion joints.
2. Pipe bends and loops.
3. Alignment guides and anchors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for
selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and bends.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods
of assembly and attachment to building structure.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.
4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end
connections, and location for each expansion joint.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Product certificates.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. Steel Shapes and Plates: AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. Welding to Piping: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING 220516-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1120, circular-corrugated-bellows type with external tie
rods.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc.
c. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
d. Flexicraft Industries.
e. Flex-Pression, Ltd.
f. Metraflex, Inc.
3. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Single- or multiple-ply phosphor-bronze
bellows, copper pipe end connections, and brass shrouds.
4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Configuration: Single- or double-bellows type, unless otherwise indicated.
6. End Connections: Flanged or weld.
2.2 ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment
of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
c. Flexicraft Industries.
d. Metraflex, Inc.
e.
2.3 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS
A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING 220516-3
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened
portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi minimum. Comply with requirements in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Install manufactured, nonmetallic expansion joints according to FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-
Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."
B. Install expansion joints of sizes matching size of piping in which they are installed.
C. Install alignment guides to allow expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb
tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 SWING CONNECTIONS
A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in main.
B. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee
in riser.
C. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee
in main.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING 220516-4
3.4 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.5 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and
to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure.
Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and include
embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion-joint manufacturer's written instructions if expansion
joints are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed on or in
concrete.
END OF SECTION 220516
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519-1
SECTION 220519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
C. Case: Die-cast aluminum, 7 inches long.
D. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury filled, with magnifying lens.
E. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
F. Window: Glass.
G. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
H. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit
installation.
I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519-2
2.2 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
2. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
5. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
6. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
C. Description: Direct-mounting, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME B40.3.
D. Case: Liquid-filled type, stainless steel with 3-inch diameter.
E. Element: Bimetal coil.
F. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
G. Pointer: Red metal.
H. Window: Glass.
I. Ring: Stainless steel.
J. Connector: Adjustable angle type.
K. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
2.3 THERMOWELLS
A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
2.4 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519-3
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
C. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME B40.100.
1. Case: Liquid-filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch diameter.
2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red metal.
7. Window: Glass.
8. Ring: Metal.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
D. Pressure-Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type.
2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal disc
of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the outlet of each domestic, hot-water storage tank.
B. Install liquid-filled-case-type, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge of each
pump.
C. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
B. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
3.3 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519-4
B. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical position
in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
C. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
readable position.
D. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage.
E. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment.
F. Adjust faces of thermometers and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
END OF SECTION 220519
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-1
SECTION 220523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:
1. Copper-alloy ball valves.
2. Copper-alloy butterfly valves.
3. Bronze check valves.
4. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
5. Bronze gate valves.
6. Bronze globe valves.
B. See Division 21 fire-suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire-protection valves.
C. See Division 22 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve
design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and
required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities;
furnished specialties; and accessories.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and
design criteria.
B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-2
2.2 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
2. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24
for bronze valves.
I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.
1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and
globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.3 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Jamesbury, Inc.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-3
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Flow-Tek, Inc.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Honeywell Braukmann.
h. Jamesbury, Inc.
i. Milwaukee Valve Company.
j. NIBCO INC.
k. Red-White Valve Corp.
l. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
C. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome-plated bronze ball, PTFE
or TFE seats, and 400-psig CWP rating.
D. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze
ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
2.4 COPPER-ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flangeless, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line.
c. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Metraflex Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. Mueller Steam Specialty.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Red-White Valve Corp.
j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Single-Flange, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
c. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Metraflex Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. Mueller Steam Specialty.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Red-White Valve Corp.
j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and lining
suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-4
C. Flangeless, 150-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-
piece stem.
D. Flangeless, 175-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-
piece stem.
E. Flangeless, 200-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-
piece stem.
F. Flangeless, 250-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-
piece stem.
G. Single-Flange, 150-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type with one- or
two-piece stem.
H. Single-Flange, 175-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type with one- or
two-piece stem.
I. Single-Flange, 200-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type with one- or
two-piece stem.
J. Single-Flange, 250-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type with one- or
two-piece stem.
2.5 BRONZE CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 1, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Walworth Co.
2. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Red-White Valve Corp.
3. Type 3, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Metal Disc:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Cincinnati Valve Co.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-5
i. Powell, Wm. Co.
j. Red-White Valve Corp.
k. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
l. Milwaukee Valve Company.
m. NIBCO INC.
n. Red-White Valve Corp.
o. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
C. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.
D. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.
E. Type 3, Class 200, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.
2.6 SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type I, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Mueller Steam Specialty.
2. Type II, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc.
b. Flomatic Valves.
c. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Metraflex Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. Mueller Steam Specialty.
h. NIBCO INC.
3. Type III, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc.
b. Flomatic Valves.
c. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Metraflex Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. Multiplex Manufacturing Co.
h. NIBCO INC.
4. Type IV, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Check-All Valve Mfg. Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Metraflex Co.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-6
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. Mueller Steam Specialty.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring-loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze or
alloy seat.
C. Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter
matching companion flanges.
D. Type I, Class 250, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter
matching companion flanges.
E. Type II, Class 125, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact-wafer style with cast-iron
shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle.
F. Type II, Class 250, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact-wafer style with cast-iron
shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle.
G. Type III, Class 125, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast-iron shell and flanged
ends.
H. Type III, Class 250, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast-iron shell and flanged
ends.
I. Type IV, Class 125, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and
threaded ends.
J. Type IV, Class 150, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and
threaded ends.
2.7 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 1, Bronze, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Type 2, Bronze, Rising-Stem, Solid-Wedge Gate Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-7
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Powell, Wm. Co.
j. Red-White Valve Corp.
B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge.
D. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge.
E. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge.
F. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge.
G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge.
H. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge.
2.8 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 1, Bronze Globe Valves with Metal Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
i. Walworth Co.
2. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-8
C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc.
D. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc.
E. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc.
F. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc.
G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc.
H. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use
the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher CWP
ratings may be substituted.
C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with
EPDM liner.
4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, horizontal or vertical, bronze.
5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze.
6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron.
7. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single-plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150, ferrous
alloy.
8. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 125 minimum.
9. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, cast iron.
10. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze.
11. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron.
12. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze.
13. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast iron.
D. Sanitary Waste Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
3. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 3, Class 125, bronze.
4. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, gray iron.
5. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523-9
6. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron.
7. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze.
8. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, cast iron.
E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according
to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 ADJUSTING
1. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION 220523
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529-1
SECTION 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Equipment supports.
B. See Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
C. See Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire-
suppression piping.
D. See Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and
anchors.
E. See Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for
vibration isolation devices.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems,
system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529-2
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers:
1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.
2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
3. Empire Industries, Inc.
4. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
5. Grinnell Corp.
6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
7. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
8. PHS Industries, Inc.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529-3
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and
other components.
B. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal
shield.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate with vapor barrier.
D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air
temperature.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529-4
2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with
pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Empire Industries, Inc.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Powers Fasteners.
2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529-5
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping
system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not
have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct
contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to
NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal
movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not
necessary.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe
hangers from concrete ceiling.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529-6
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by
using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation
that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4
inches.
2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified
in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments
where required in concrete construction.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports,
clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529-7
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping
of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and
at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to
forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert
with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529-8
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated.
Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529-9
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 220529
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 1
SECTION 220533 - HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing piping heat tracing for freeze prevention, domestic hot-water-
temperature maintenance, and snow and ice melting on roofs and in gutters and downspouts
with the following electric heating cables:
1. Plastic insulated, series resistance.
2. Self-regulating, parallel resistance.
B. See Division 21 Section "Heat Tracing for Fire-Suppression Piping."
C. See Division 23 Section "Heat Tracing for HVAC Piping."
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each type of product indicated.
1. Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for
each electric heating cable required.
B. Shop Drawings: For electric heating cable. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 2
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. BH Thermal Corporation.
2. Chromalox, Inc.; Wiegard Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company.
3. Delta-Therm Corporation.
4. Easy Heat Inc.
5. Nelson Heat Trace.
6. Pyrotenax; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls.
7. Raychem; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls.
8. Thermon Manufacturing Co.
9. Trasor Corp.
2.2 CONTROLS
A. Pipe-Mounting Thermostats for Freeze Protection:
1. Remote bulb unit with adjustable temperature range from 30 to 50 deg F.
2. Snap action; open-on-rise, single-pole switch with minimum current rating adequate for
connected cable.
3. Remote bulb on capillary, resistance temperature device, or thermistor for directly
sensing pipe-wall temperature.
4. Corrosion-resistant, waterproof control enclosure.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 3
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end
seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
B. Warning Labels: Refer to Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
C. Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils thick, and with
pressure-sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back.
1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch
minimum.
2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2
inches minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Install the following types of electric heating cable for the applications described:
1. Snow and Ice Melting on Roofs and in Gutters and Downspouts: Self-regulating,
parallel-resistance heating cable.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install electric heating cable across expansion, construction, and control joints according to
manufacturer's written recommendations using cable protection conduit and slack cable to allow
movement without damage to cable.
B. Electric Heating Cable Installation for Snow and Ice Melting on Roofs and in Gutters and
Downspouts: Install on roof and in gutters and downspouts with clips furnished by
manufacturer that are compatible with roof, gutters, and downspouts.
C. Electric Heating Cable Installation for Freeze Protection for Piping:
1. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is
installed.
2. Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1.
3. Install insulation over piping with electric cables according to Division 22 Section
"Plumbing Insulation."
4. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating
cables.
D. Electric Heating Cable Installation for Temperature Maintenance for Domestic Hot Water:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 4
1. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is
installed.
2. Install insulation over piping with electric heating cables according to Division 22
Section "Plumbing Insulation."
3. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating
cables.
E. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
F. Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage.
G. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as
insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete.
1. Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.
2. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current
simultaneously.
B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal
insulation on pipe-mounting cables.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 220533
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548-1
SECTION 220548 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Isolation mounts.
3. Housed spring mounts.
4. Elastomeric hangers.
5. Spring hangers.
6. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
7. Pipe riser resilient supports.
8. Resilient pipe guides.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more
stringent.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear
anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC-ES, or preapproved by
another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint
ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If
preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred.
Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must
be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corporation.
4. Isolation Technology, Inc.
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
6. Mason Industries.
7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
8. Vibration Isolation.
9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
D. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area,
molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
E. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed
fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to
equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate
capacity range.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing,
oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment
hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-
bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
F. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to
fasten and level equipment.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548-3
7. or failure.
G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.
2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down before
contacting a resilient collar.
H. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric
isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or
otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in
compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum
of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup
to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring
coil.
J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger
with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum
of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded
rod.
8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring
coil.
K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548-4
arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the
isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.
L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a
factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and
contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of
pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an
evaluation service member of ICC-ES.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to
receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within
specified loading limits.
3.2 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between
anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches.
2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of
ICC-ES providing required submittals for component.
B. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80
feet o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-
ES providing required submittals for component.
E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548-5
G. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered
during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications
conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full
design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve
anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor
is to be fastened.
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior
applications.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to
restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least
seven days' advance notice.
3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary
load-spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7. Measure isolator deflection.
8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results
are achieved.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal
operation.
C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
1. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548-6
END OF SECTION 220548
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220553-1
& EQUIPMENT
SECTION 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-
1/2 by 3/4 inch.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for
greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: White.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-
1/2 by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220553-2
& EQUIPMENT
greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing
numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section
number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond
paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is
indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where
equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch
thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by
3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch
for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe
and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220553-3
& EQUIPMENT
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices,
including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."
B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed
locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where
flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of
congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Domestic Water Piping:
a. Background Color: White.
b. Letter Color: Black.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220553-4
& EQUIPMENT
2. Sanitary Waste Piping:
a. Background Color: White.
b. Letter Color: Black.
END OF SECTION 220553
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-1
SECTION 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Cellular glass.
b. Flexible elastomeric.
c. Mineral fiber.
d. Polyolefin.
e. Polystyrene.
2. Insulating cements.
3. Adhesives.
4. Mastics.
5. Sealants.
6. Factory-applied jackets.
7. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
8. Field-applied jackets.
9. Tapes.
10. Securements.
11. Corner angles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."
2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type
of insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.
6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-2
8. Detail field application for each equipment type.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and
jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of
50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index
of 150 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than
50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to
ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-3
7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
H. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin-Glas.
b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations.
I. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied jacket.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas.
c. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations.
d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board.
e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW.
f. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt.
J. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A,with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
K. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or
Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5
lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or
less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-4
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.
b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.
c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
L. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation. Comply
with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not
exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to
ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam.
b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cellular-Glass Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature
range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.
C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-5
d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
E. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service temperature
range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 97-13.
F. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
G. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.
b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.
e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-
19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-6
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-70.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45/30-46.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-7
3. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
4. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
6. Color: White or gray.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: White.
2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-
applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
4. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier
film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-
spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-8
5. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier
film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-
spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
6. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based
adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. inch, in a Leno weave, for equipment and pipe.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.
b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-
C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is
indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-9
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions,
reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply
covers for lavatories.
5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
C. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
2. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
4. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
5. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
6. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.
c. Tee covers.
d. Flange and union covers.
e. End caps.
f. Beveled collars.
g. Valve covers.
h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-10
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555.
b. Compac Corp.; 130.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape.
d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 6 mils.
4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 500 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
b. Compac Corp.; 120.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.
d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 5 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
E. PVDC Tape: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-11
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Film Thickness: 4 mils.
4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.
5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products; Bands.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T.
2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter
shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging
insulation, hangers, and substrates.
2. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.
2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-12
c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.
d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging
insulation, hangers, and substrates.
3. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable
of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking
washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA.
2) GEMCO; Press and Peel.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.
b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter
shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
2) GEMCO; R-150.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
5. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick
nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not
less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) GEMCO.
2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-13
a. C & F Wire.
b. Childers Products.
c. PABCO Metals Corporation.
d. RPR Products, Inc.
2.11 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according
to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements
for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of
voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry
state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-14
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs
from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal
ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material
manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and
dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4
inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with
outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends
adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to
thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt
joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-15
6. Cleanouts.
3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof
flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with
sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2
inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and
fire-resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific
requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-16
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against
adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces
with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with
adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each
section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material,
density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less
than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts.
Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation
by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is
thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so
strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the
insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient
services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one
pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic.
Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above
ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a
smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and
polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.
Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using
PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test
connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and
equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with
insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness
as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from
flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-17
on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum
bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the
two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered
blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to
flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each
side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating
cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is
dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces
with a metal jacket.
3.5 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with
vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1
inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-
glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-18
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe
insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve
operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated.
3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with
vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-19
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1
inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of
pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials
with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve
body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.8 POLYSTYRENE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming
insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock
positions on the pipe.
2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs
but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier
must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness of
adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch thickness.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene block insulation of same
thickness as pipe insulation.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-20
1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation.
Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end
joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with
vapor-barrier mastic.
B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints;
for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels.
Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish
bead along seam and joint edge.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c.
and at end joints.
D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to
pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.
2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end
overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap
at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and
then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.
3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive
or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to
manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to
maintain a permanent bond.
4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an
outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch- circumference limit allows
for 2-inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-21
installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for
"fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.
5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and
wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.
3.10 FINISHES
A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint
system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and
finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of
the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied
jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall
be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation
Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine
compliance.
2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-
applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded
fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of
welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for
each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-22
3.12 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a
type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
C. Heat-Exchanger (Water-to-Water for Domestic Water Heating Service) Insulation: Mineral-Fiber
Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.
D. Domestic water, domestic chilled-water (potable), and domestic hot-water hydropneumatic tank
insulation shall be the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thick.
3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.
E. Domestic Hot-Water Storage Tank Insulation: Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 4 inches thick.
F. Piping System Filter-Housing Insulation: Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.
3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each
piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection
from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be one of the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.
B. Domestic Chilled Water (Potable): Insulation shall be one of the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.
C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures
for People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be one of the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-23
2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 220700
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-1
SECTION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
C. See Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gages,
and fittings.
D. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water distribution piping
specialties.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic,
potable domestic water piping and components.
B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9,"
for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the
same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-
copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges
if required to match piping.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-2
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
D. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-
copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges
if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
E. AQUA PEX Tube: ASTM F876 and F877 and NSF Standard 14 & 61.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or
ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-
copper fittings if indicated.
2.2 VALVES
A. Bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves
for Plumbing Piping."
B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper
tubing.
D. Under-Building-Slab, Water-Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter: Refer to Division 22
Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-3
E. Domestic Water Piping on Service Side of Water Meter inside the Building: Use the following
piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 4 to NPS 6: Steel pipe; gray-iron, threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
F. Under-Building-Slab, Domestic Water Piping on House Side of Water Meter, NPS 4 and Smaller:
Hard copper tube, Type M; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
G. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Steel pipe; gray-iron, threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron
butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron
butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that
do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or
gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and
where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump
and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for
piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Balancing valves are
specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of
each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow.
Calibrated balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-4
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results
for Plumbing."
B. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration
through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation
watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the
building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gages are specified in Division 22
Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping," and drain valves and strainers are specified in
Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
E. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
F. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed
for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze
branch tube into collar.
3.6 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-5
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
E. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
F. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.
G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
B. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to
the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-6
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment
connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of
unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-
in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and
that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test,
complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it
was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without
exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for
four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping using purging and disinfecting procedures
prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-7
B. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if
biological examination shows contamination.
C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
END OF SECTION 221116
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-1
SECTION 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Water pressure-reducing valves.
4. Balancing valves.
5. Strainers.
6. Drain valves.
7. Water hammer arresters.
8. Pro Set trap Guards.
9. Domestic water shut-off valves
B. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.
C. See Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters for water coolers.
D. Domestic Water Filtration Equipment sizing and specification shall be provided by water treatment
sub-contractor.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
D. Match finishes of domestic water shut-off valves located at fixtures in residential areas with fixtures,
fittings and faucets finish.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Ames Co.
b. Cash Acme.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3. Standard: ASSE 1001.
4. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.
5. Body: Bronze.
6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
7. Finish: Rough bronze.
B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.
b. Cash Acme.
c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3. Standard: ASSE 1001.
4. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-3
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Cash Acme.
b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
c. Honeywell Water Controls.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3. Standard: ASSE 1012.
4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
5. Size: NPS 3/4.
6. Body: Bronze.
7. End Connections: Union, solder joint.
8. Finish: Chrome plated.
9.
B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Ames Co.
b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
4. Standard: ASSE 1013.
5. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
6. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
9. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; outside
screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
C. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-4
a. Ames Co.
b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
4. Standard: ASSE 1015.
5. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
7. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
8. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
9. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
10. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; outside
screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
D. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
c. Flomatic Corporation.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
4. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-
procedure instructions.
2.3 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Water Regulators:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Cash Acme.
b. Honeywell Water Controls.
c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3. Standard: ASSE 1003.
4. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-5
5. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining
complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
6. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
2.4 BALANCING VALVES
A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Red-White Valve Corp.
3. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.
4. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.
5. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.
6. Body: Copper alloy.
7. Port: Standard or full port.
8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
9. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
10. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.
11. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.
2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch.
b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch.
c. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch.
6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-6
2.6 DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.
2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.
3. Size: NPS 3/4.
4. Body: Copper alloy.
5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and
cap with brass chain.
2.7 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water Hammer Arresters:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. AMTROL, Inc.
b. Josam Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. PPP Inc.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
3. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
4. Type: Metal bellows.
5. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials,
joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other
equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-7
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under
backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
E. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and
with shutoff valve on outlet.
1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.
2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
F. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure-reducing
valve, solenoid valve, and pump.
G. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
H. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper
flow.
I. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
J. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on
or near each of the following:
1. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
3. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies.
4. Water pressure-reducing valves.
5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
6. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
K. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and
emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.
Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflow-
prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference
standard.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-8
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316-1
SECTION 221316 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the
building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Special pipe fittings.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 30-foot head of water.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
B. Coordinate P-traps in the residential areas with plumbing fixtures supplier and match P-traps or
provide similar finish as fixtures/fittings and faucets.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; and
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
B. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316-2
1. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator
drainage fittings.
2. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant
fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel
corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564,
rubber sleeve.
b. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-
steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following:
1. Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results
for Plumbing."
B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary
sewers.
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration
through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation
watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316-3
F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches,
bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical
stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch
and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.
Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more
than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are
connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and
alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install
required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and
other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
I. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is
without membrane waterproofing.
J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing
Piping."
B. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwater valve.
3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
4. Backwater valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316-4
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
4. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60
inches.
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required
by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316-5
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping
Specialties."
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and
union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be
made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make
required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221316
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-1
SECTION 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Floor drains.
4. Roof flashing assemblies.
5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
6. Flashing materials.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics,
and accessories for grease interceptors.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-2
4. Standard: ASME A112.14.1.
5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Body: Cast iron.
7. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve.
8. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless.
9. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to
hang closed.
10. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-
installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.
B. Drain-Outlet Backwater Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
c. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
3. Size: Same as floor drain outlet.
4. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain.
5. Check Valve: Removable ball float.
6. Inlet: Threaded.
7. Outlet: Threaded or spigot.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
6. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
7. Closure: Countersunk, cast-iron plug.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-3
8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Oatey.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.
5. Size: Same as connected branch.
6. Type: Adjustable housing.
7. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
8. Clamping Device: Required.
9. Outlet Connection: Spigot.
10. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
11. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
12. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.
13. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
14. Top Loading Classification: Heavy] Duty.
15. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.
5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-4
6. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
7. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug.
8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
9. Wall Access: Round, deep, chrome-plated bronze cover plate with screw.
10. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, wall-installation frame and cover.
2.3 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Commercial Enameling Co.
b. Josam Company; Josam Div.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Prier Products, Inc.
e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.
b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.
B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead flashing collar
and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and
counterflashing fitting.
1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.
2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-5
2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.
B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials,
joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck
plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve
cover for servicing.
C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger
cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger
piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished
floor.
E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated,
with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-6
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set
with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch
total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch
total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
H. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
I. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.
J. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
K. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
L. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge
into sanitary drainage system.
M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
N. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
O. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
P. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-7
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required.
Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder
joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and
roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt
or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing
fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into
cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on
or near each grease interceptor.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and
emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.
Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to
prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221319
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-1
SECTION 221413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Specialty pipe fittings.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for storm drainage piping outside the
building.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. NOT USED.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for
plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-2
2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ANACO-Husky.
b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
c. Fernco Inc.
d. Matco-Norca, Inc.
e. MIFAB, Inc.
f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
g. Stant.
h. Tyler Pipe.
2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.
3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening
devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
C. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ANACO-Husky.
b. Clamp-All Corp.
c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
d. MIFAB, Inc.
e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
f. Stant.
g. Tyler Pipe.
2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540.
3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and
ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-3
B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast-copper fittings or ASME B16.29, wrought-copper,
solder-joint fittings.
C. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.
1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-
inchmaximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.
2.5 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40.
B. Cellular-Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40.
C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.
D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235.
1. Use ABS solvent cement that has a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.
C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to
fit Schedule 40 pipe.
D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
1. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.7 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Transition Couplings:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-4
1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or
of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be
joined.
2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified-piping-system
fitting.
3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
2) Fernco Inc.
3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.
b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.
c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear
ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
d. Sleeve Materials:
1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with
pipe materials being joined.
4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.
c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer
shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each
end.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTH MOVING
A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31
Section "Earth Moving."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-5
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-
sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard
increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in
direction of flow is prohibited.
I. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each
joint as completed.
J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:
1. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
K. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
L. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
M. Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661.
N. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.
O. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
P. Plumbing Specialties:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-6
1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for
backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm
sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside
the building in storm drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts
specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains
specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
Q. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for
sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements
for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
B. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.
C. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828 procedure. Use
ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.
D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in
cross pattern.
E. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.
3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Transition Couplings:
1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.
2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-7
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves.
2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm
Drainage Piping Specialties."
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in
Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.
2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.
3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
4. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feetor Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 incheswith 3/8-inchrod.
2. NPS 3: 60 incheswith 1/2-inchrod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 560 incheswith 5/8-inchrod.
4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 incheswith 3/4-inchrod.
5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 0 incheswith 7/8-inchrod.
6. Spacing for 10-footpipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited
to 60 inches.
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet
H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-8
I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush
with floor.
2. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Division 22 Section "Storm
Drainage Piping Specialties."
D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of
equipment.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in
Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be
made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make
required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence
of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test,
complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it
was tested.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413-9
3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of
roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not
less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of
inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.
3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
C. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.
3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
END OF SECTION 221413
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423-1
SECTION 221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof drains.
2. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
3. Cleanouts.
4. Flashing materials.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron, Small-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains:
1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.
2. Body Material: Cast iron.
3. Dimension of Body: Nominal 8-inchdiameter.
4. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
5. Outlet: Bottom.
6. Extension Collars: Not required.
7. Underdeck Clamp: Required.
8. Expansion Joint: Not required.
9. Sump Receiver Plate: Not required.
10. Dome Material: Cast iron.
11. Wire Mesh: Not required.
12. Vandal-Proof Dome: Not required.
B. Metal, Parapet Roof Drains:
1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for parapet roof drains.
2. Body Material: Cast iron.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423-2
3. Outlet: Angle.
4. Grate Material: Nickel-bronze alloy.
5. Vandal-Proof Grate: Not required.
C. Metal, Small-Sump, Deck Roof Drains:
1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for deck roof drains; ASME A112.6.3, for floor drains.
2. Body Material: Metal.
3. Flange: Not required.
4. Clamping Device: Not required.
5. Integral Backwater Valve: Not required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Grate Material: Nickel bronze.
8. Grate Finish: Not required.
9. Overall Dimension of Frame and Grate: Nominal 8 inches round.
10. Top-Loading Classification: Light Duty.
11. Vandal-Proof Frame and Grate: Not required.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Downspout Adaptors:
1. Description: Manufactured, gray-iron casting, for attaching to horizontal-outlet, parapet roof
drain and to exterior, sheet metal downspout.
2. Size: Inlet size to match parapet drain outlet.
B. Downspout Boots:
1. Description: Manufactured, ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron casting, with strap or ears for
attaching to building; NPS 4outlet; and shop-applied bituminous coating.
2. Size: Inlet size to match downspout and NPS 4outlet.
C. Conductor Nozzles:
1. Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting holes.
2. Size: Same as connected conductor.
2.3 CLEANOUTS
A. Floor Cleanouts:
1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for adjustable housing cleanouts.
2. Size: Same as connected branch.
3. Type: Adjustable housing.
4. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.
5. Clamping Device: Not required.
6. Outlet Connection: Threaded.
7. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device.
9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423-3
10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
11. Top-Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
B. Test Tees:
1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for cleanout
test tees.
2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
3. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or hubless, cast-iron soil-pipe
test tee as required to match connected piping.
4. Closure Plug: Countersunk or raised head, brass.
5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
C. Wall Cleanouts:
1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access.
2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
3. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch as required to match connected
piping.
4. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, drilled-and-threaded cast-iron plug.
5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.
2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ft.
B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-
inchminimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90hot-dip galvanized, mill-
phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-milminimum
thickness.
D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written
installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07 Sections.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423-4
1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and adjoining
roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
B. Install downspout adapters on outlet of back-outlet parapet roof drains and connect to sheet metal
downspouts.
C. Install downspout boots at grade with top 12 inchesabove grade. Secure to building wall.
D. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.
E. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following
instructions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4.
2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feetfor piping NPS 4and smaller and 100 feetfor
larger piping.
4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
F. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished
floor.
G. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated,
with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
H. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.
I. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated.
J. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof membrane.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft.lead sheets, 0.0938-inchthickness or thicker. Solder
joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft.lead sheets, 0.0625-inchthickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and
roofs with waterproof membrane.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423-5
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inchesand
with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inchesaround pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inchesaround sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
inchesaround specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to
prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221423
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-1
SECTION 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. HVAC demolition.
8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
9. Concrete bases.
10. Supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe
and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples
include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-2
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved
and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may
be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical
services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings
or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum
thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-3
2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint,
plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum
working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
B. Sealing Elements: EPDM and NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C. Pressure Plates: Plastic, Carbon steel], and Stainless steel]. Include two for each sealing element.
D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating and stainless steel of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and
integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-4
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for
attaching to wooden forms.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit
around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
2.7 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,
and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-5
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-6
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.
Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free
solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,
using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading
is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding
operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper
towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe
manufacturer's written instructions.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-7
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials
of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written
instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base,
and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-8
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC
materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.8 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base
plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 230500
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513-1
SECTION 230513 COMMON MOTOR WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal,
small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and
installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for
field installation.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC
equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 70 deg f and at altitude of 8,150 feet above sea
level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and
without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513-2
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H. Insulation: Class F.
I. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame
sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated
with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-
width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
5. All Three phase motors shall be provided with phase loss protection.
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of
specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513-3
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when
winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.
Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION 230513
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516-1
SECTION 230516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal-bellows expansion joints.
2. Expansion compensators.
3. Packed slip expansion joints.
4. Pipe bends and loops.
5. Alignment guides and anchors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for
selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and bends.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods
of assembly and attachment to building structure.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.
4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end
connections, and location for each expansion joint.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Product certificates.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. Steel Shapes and Plates: AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. Welding to Piping: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1120, circular-corrugated-bellows type with external tie
rods.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product name,
designation, or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
c. Flexicraft Industries.
d. Flex-Pression, Ltd.
e. Flex-Weld, Inc.
f. Metraflex, Inc.
g. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
h. Proco Products, Inc.
3. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Single or Multiple-ply phosphor-bronze
bellows, copper pipe end connections, and brass shrouds.
4. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single, or multiple-ply stainless-steel
bellows, steel pipe end connections, and carbon-steel shroud.
5. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Configuration: Single, or double bellows type with base, unless otherwise indicated.
7. End Connections: Flanged or welded.
B. Expansion Compensators: Double-ply corrugated steel, stainless-steel, or copper-alloy bellows in a
housing with internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product name or
designation or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Flexicraft Industries.
c. Flex-Pression, Ltd.
d. Flex-Weld, Inc.
e. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
f. Metraflex, Inc.
g. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division.
h. Unaflex Inc.
3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Configuration for Copper Piping: Two-ply phosphor-bronze or stainless-steel bellows and
bronze or stainless-steel shroud.
5. Configuration for Steel Piping: Two-ply stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.
6. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516-3
7. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.
8. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded.
C. Packed Slip Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1007, carbon-steel, packing type designed for repacking
under pressure and pressure rated for 250 psig at 400 deg F minimum. Include asbestos-free PTFE
packing, compound limit stops, and drip connection if used for steam piping.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings, or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
c. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
3. Configuration: Single- and double-joint class with base, unless otherwise indicated.
4. End Connections: Flanged or weld ends to match piping system.
2.2 ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment
of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
c. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
d. Flexicraft Industries.
e. Flex-Weld, Inc.
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
g. Metraflex, Inc.
h. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
i. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division.
2.3 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS
A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened
portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516-4
2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi minimum. Comply with requirements in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Install manufactured, nonmetallic expansion joints according to FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-
Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."
B. Install expansion joints of sizes matching size of piping in which they are installed.
C. Install alignment guides to allow expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb
tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 SWING CONNECTIONS
A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in main.
3.4 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516-5
3.5 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and
to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure.
Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and include
embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion-joint manufacturer's written instructions if expansion
joints or compensators are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed on or in
concrete.
END OF SECTION 230516
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519-1
SECTION 230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
3. Flowmeters.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
B. Case: Die-cast aluminum, brass or Chrome-plated brass 7 inches or 9 inches] long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
E. Window: Glass or plastic.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device, rigid, straight or angle type, type].
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit
installation.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519-2
2.2 DUCT-TYPE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product
by one of the following:
1. Miljoco Corp.
2. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Case: Die-cast aluminum, metal or plastic, 7 inches long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic filled, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
E. Window: Glass or plastic.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device, rigid or angle type.
G. Stem: Metal, for installation in mounting bracket and of length to suit installation.
H. Mounting Bracket: Flanged fitting for attachment to duct and made to hold thermometer stem.
I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
2.3 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
2. Ernst Gage Co.
3. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation.
4. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.
5. Trerice, H. O. Co.
6. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Description: Direct-mounting, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME B40.3.
C. Case: Dry or Liquid-filled type, stainless steel with 3-inch to 5-inch diameter.
D. Element: Bimetal coil.
E. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
F. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
G. Window: Glass or plastic.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519-3
H. Ring: Stainless steel.
I. Connector: Adjustable angle, rigid, back or bottom type.
J. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
K. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
2.4 THERMOWELLS
A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
2.5 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
2. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME B40.100.
1. Case: Dry or Liquid-filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, metal or plastic, 4-1/2-inch
to 6-inch diameter.
2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color, metal.
7. Window: Glass or plastic.
8. Ring: Brass, Stainless steel or plastic.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, (plus or minus 1 percent of middle half) or B (plus or minus 2 percent of
middle half) scale.
10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
C. Pressure-Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type.
2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal disc
of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519-4
2.6 VENTURI FLOWMETERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
2. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div.
3. Bailey-Fischer & Porter Co.
4. Flow Design, Inc.
5. Victaulic Co. of America.
B. Description: Differential-pressure design for installation in piping; with calibrated flow-measuring
element, separate flowmeter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings, and conversion chart compatible with
flow-measuring element, flowmeter, and system fluid.
C. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and attached tag with flow
conversion data.
D. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
E. Temperature Rating: 250 deg F.
F. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.
G. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged or welded.
H. Range: Flow range of flow-measuring element and flowmeter shall cover operating range of
equipment or system served.
I. Permanent Indicators: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for connected flowmeter
element, and having 6-inch- diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for
connecting to flowmeter element.
1. Scale: Gallons per minute.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of range.
J. Portable Indicators: Differential-pressure type calibrated for connected flowmeter element and
having two 12-foot hoses in carrying case.
1. Scale: Gallons per minute.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20 and 80 percent of range.
K. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519-5
2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
3. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
B. Install bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.
2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
3. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
C. Install dry or liquid-filled-case-type, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge
of each pump.
D. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
1. Heating Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions
2. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions
3. Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 110 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions
3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
B. Install dry or liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at chilled- and condenser-water inlets and outlets
of chillers.
C. Install dry or liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
3.3 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees
where thermometers are indicated.
C. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are indicated.
Attach to duct with screws.
D. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
readable position.
E. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).
F. Install needle-valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.
G. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and
flowmeters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.
I. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe
upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519-6
J. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.
K. Install flowmeters at discharge of hydronic system pumps and at inlet of hydronic air coils.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance for
meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
END OF SECTION 230519
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523-1
SECTION 230523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:
1. Copper-alloy ball valves.
2. Ferrous-alloy butterfly valves.
3. Bronze check valves.
4. Gray-iron swing check valves.
5. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
6. Bronze gate valves.
7. Cast-iron gate valves.
8. Bronze globe valves.
B. See Division 21 fire-suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire-protection valves.
C. See Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control valves and actuators.
D. See Division 23 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve
design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and
required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities;
furnished specialties; and accessories.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and
design criteria.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply for product selection:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523-2
2.2 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ferrous Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
2. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24
for bronze valves.
I. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe
valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
J. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
K. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.3 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. One-Piece, Full Port Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. DynaQuip Controls.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Jamesbury, Inc.
g. Kitz Corporation of America.
h. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
i. NIBCO INC.
j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Safety-Exhaust, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523-3
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
b. DynaQuip Controls.
c. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Jamesbury, Inc.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
B. Full Port Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
C. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome-plated bronze ball, PTFE
or TFE seats, and 400-psig minimum CWP rating.
D. Safety-Exhaust, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Two-piece bronze body with exhaust vent opening,
chrome-plated ball with vent, blowout-proof stem, locking handle, and working pressure rating
of 400-psig CWP.
2.4 FERROUS-ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flangeless, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line.
c. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. Mueller Steam Specialty.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Single-Flange, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. Mueller Steam Specialty.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and lining
suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flangeless, 150-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-
piece stem.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523-4
2.5 BRONZE CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 2, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Walworth Co.
2. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Kitz Corporation of America.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
3. Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and
bronze seat.
D. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and
bronze seat.
E. Type 4, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze
seat.
2.6 GRAY-IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
3. Mueller Co.
4. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP-71.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523-5
C. Type II, Class 125, gray-iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats.
D. Type II, Class 250, gray-iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats.
2.7 SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type I, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Mueller Steam Specialty.
2. Type II, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. Mueller Steam Specialty.
f. NIBCO INC.
3. Type III, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Hammond Valve.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. NIBCO INC.
4. Type IV, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Check-All Valve Mfg. Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. Mueller Steam Specialty.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring-loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze or
alloy seat.
C. Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter
matching companion flanges.
D. Type II, Class 125, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact-wafer style with cast-iron
shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle.
E. Type III, Class 125, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast-iron shell and flanged
ends.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523-6
F. Type IV, Class 150, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and
threaded ends.
2.8 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 2, Bronze, Rising-Stem, Solid-Wedge Gate Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Cincinnati Valve Co.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Red-White Valve Corp.
j. Walworth Co.
2. Type 3, Bronze, Rising-Stem, Split-Wedge Gate Valves:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
c. Grinnell Corporation.
d. NIBCO INC.
B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge and
union-ring bonnet.
D. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge[ and
union-ring bonnet].
E. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge and
union-ring bonnet.
2.9 CAST-IRON GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type I, Cast-Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523-7
g. Red-White Valve Corp.
h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Type I, Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Red-White Valve Corp.
h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Cast-Iron Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-70, Type I.
C. Class 125, NRS, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim,
nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.
D. Class 125, OS&Y, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, rising
stem, and solid-wedge disc.
2.10 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Red-White Valve Corp.
j. Walworth Co.
B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic PTFE or TFE disc and
union-ring bonnet.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523-8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use
the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves.
2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with
higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Chilled-Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One, or Two 150-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150 ferrous alloy.
3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single-flange 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy,
with EPDM liner.
4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150 horizontal or vertical, bronze.
5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze.
6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 250, gray iron.
7. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single or Dual-plate, wafer, wafer-lug, or
double-flanged, Class 125 or 150 ferrous alloy.
8. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 150.
9. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, II or III, Class 125,
cast iron.
10. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2 or 3, Class 150, bronze.
11. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, NRS, OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast
iron.
12. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
13. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze-mounted cast iron.
D. Heating Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One, or Two 150-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150 ferrous alloy.
3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single-flange 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy,
with EPDM liner.
4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150 horizontal or vertical, bronze.
5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze.
6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 250, gray iron.
7. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single or Dual-plate, wafer, wafer-lug, or
double-flanged, Class 125 or 150 ferrous alloy.
8. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 150.
9. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, II or III, Class 125,
cast iron.
10. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2 or 3, Class 150, bronze.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523-9
11. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, NRS, OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast
iron.
12. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
13. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze-mounted cast iron.
E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide valves
with threaded ends for heating hot water, steam, and steam condensate services.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded ends.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded ends.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic piping joint construction.
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before
final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION 230523
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529-1
SECTION 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Equipment supports.
B. See Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
C. See Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire-
protection piping.
D. See Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and
anchors.
E. See Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for
vibration isolation devices.
F. See Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" and "Nonmetal Ducts” for duct hangers and supports.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems,
system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from
authorities having jurisdiction.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529-2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and
installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers:
1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.
2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
5. Empire Industries, Inc.
6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
8. Grinnell Corp.
9. GS Metals Corp.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529-3
10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
12. PHS Industries, Inc.
13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and
other components.
B. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal
shield.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3. PHS Industries, Inc.
4. Pipe Shields, Inc.
5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529-4
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air
temperature.
2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with
pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Empire Industries, Inc.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Powers Fasteners.
2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529-5
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping
system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not
have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct
contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to
NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal
movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not
necessary.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529-6
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe
hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by
using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation
that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4
inches.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529-7
2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified
in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments
where required in concrete construction.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports,
clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping
of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529-8
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and
at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to
forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services
piping) are not exceeded.
M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert
with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated.
Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529-9
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 230529
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING 230548-1
SECTION 230548 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Isolation mounts.
3. Housed spring mounts.
4. Elastomeric hangers.
5. Spring hangers.
6. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
7. Pipe riser resilient supports.
8. Resilient pipe guides.
9. Restraining braces and cables.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corporation.
4. Isolation Technology, Inc.
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
6. Mason Industries.
7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
8. Vibration Isolation.
C. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area,
molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene, rubber and/or hermetically sealed
compressed fiberglass.
D. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed
fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING 230548-2
equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate
capacity range.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing,
oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment
hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-
bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
E. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing,
oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment
hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-
bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
F. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to
fasten and level equipment.
G. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop
restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight
being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene or rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling
bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
H. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.
2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down before
contacting a resilient collar.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING 230548-3
I. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric
isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or
otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
J. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in
compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum
of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup
to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring
coil.
K. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger
with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum
of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded
rod.
8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring
coil.
L. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops
arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the
isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.
M. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a
factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING 230548-4
contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of
pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an
evaluation service member of ICC-ES, OSHPD and/or an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to
receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within
specified loading limits.
3.2 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs,
equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
B. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between
anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
C. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80
feet o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-
ES, OSHPD and/or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required
submittals for component.
F. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
H. Drilled-in Anchors:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING 230548-5
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered
during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications
conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full
design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve
anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor
is to be fastened.
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
END OF SECTION 230548
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT 230553-1
SECTION 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT
PARTR 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Duct labels.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, (0.032-inch) Stainless steel, (0.025-inch) Aluminum, (0.032-
inch) or anodized aluminum, (0.032-inch) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and/or Yellow.
3. Background Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and/or Yellow to contrast against letter color.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT 230553-2
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing
numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section
number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond
paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is
indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where
equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 thick,
and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and/or Yellow.
C. Background Color Black, Blue, Red, White, and/or Yellow to contrast against letter color.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4
inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch
for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel [rivets] [rivets or self-tapping screws] [self-tapping screws].
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to [partially cover] [cover full]
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT 230553-3
2.4 DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch
thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and/or Yellow.
C. Background Color: Background Color Black, Blue, Red, White, and/or Yellow to contrast against
letter color.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4
inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch
for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations
as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices,
including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting and
High-Performance Coatings."
B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed
locations as follows:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT 230553-4
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where
flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas
of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Chilled-Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and/or Yellow..
b. Letter Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and/or Yellow to contrast against letter color.
2. Heating Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and/or Yellow..
b. Letter Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and/or Yellow to contrast against letter color.
3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic-laminated or self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the
following color codes:
1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts.
2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50
feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
END OF SECTION 230553
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-1
SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
B. Certified TAB reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by NEBB or TABB.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by NEBB or TABB.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by NEBB or TABB
as a TAB technician.
B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-2
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.
2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by consulting engineer.
D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,
Section 5, "Instrumentation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that
locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for
environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about
HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that
can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a
system.
2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance.
To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans
and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the
design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning,
and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and
tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
I. Examine terminal units, such as heat pumps, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are
connected and functioning.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-3
J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated
perforations.
K. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing
fluid flows.
L. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and
record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to
balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in
NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems",
SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.
1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as
used to construct ducts.
2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings,
vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-4
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable,
permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended
testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan
volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan
manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements,
measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream
from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-5
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that
houses the fan.
3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop
unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual
static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to
accommodate actual conditions.
6. Obtain approval from Consulting Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling units for
adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.
7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-
heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake
horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows
within specified tolerances.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the
total airflow for that zone.
2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume
dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust
submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the
dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities
without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-6
3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of
system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.
3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves
are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement
pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure
differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage
heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump
has the intended impeller size.
a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from
Consulting Engineer and comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic
Pumps."
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and
mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated
water flow is achieved.
a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload
conditions.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-7
C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open
position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop
relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than indicated flow.
G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.
J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from
minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record
observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and
nameplate data.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-8
C. Record compressor data.
3.10 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS
A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.
3.11 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.13 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in
"Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices.
Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance
measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general
construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: Prepare progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress,
and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-9
and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving
multiple floors.
3.14 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for
tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-
10
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each
system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are
being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-1
SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for boiler breeching, ductwork, equipment, and pipe,
including the following:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Cellular glass.
b. Flexible elastomeric.
c. Mineral fiber.
d. Polystyrene.
2. Fire-rated insulation systems.
3. Insulating cements.
4. Adhesives.
5. Mastics.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory-applied jackets.
8. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
9. Field-applied jackets.
10. Tapes.
11. Securements.
12. Corner angles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation
and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.
6. Application of field-applied jackets.
7. Application at linkages of control devices.
8. Field application for each equipment type.
C. Field quality-control inspection reports.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-2
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and
jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of
50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index
of 150 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than
50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to
ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-3
a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type II with factory-applied vinyl jacket.
Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
I. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket.
1. Products:
a. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin-Glas.
b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations.
J. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply
with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with
factory-applied ASJ. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ.
Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-4
e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
K. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied jacket.
1. Products:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas.
c. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations.
d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board.
e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW.
f. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt.
L. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Products:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
3. Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
M. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with
ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory applied to the entire inside surface of
preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of insulation
under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor-retarder jacket with self-sealing
adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the longitudinal seam,
exposing the absorbent cloth.
1. Products:
a. Knauf Insulation; Permawick Pipe Insulation.
b. Owens Corning; VaporWick Pipe Insulation.
N. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or
Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5
lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or
less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-5
a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.
b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.
c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
O. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation. Comply
with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not
exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to
ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
1. Products:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam.
b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene.
2.3 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
1. Products:
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
2.4 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cellular-Glass and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature
range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.
C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Products:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-6
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1. Products:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.
b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.
e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
2.5 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates: Comply with MIL-
C-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-7
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-70.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45/30-46.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
3. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
4. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
6. Color: White or gray.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-8
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: White.
2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-
applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier
film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-
spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier
film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-
spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
7. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based
adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.
a. Products:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
8. Vinyl Jacket: UL-rated white vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to
ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-9
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-
C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is
indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1. Products:
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions,
reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply
covers for lavatories.
5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
D. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
2. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
4. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
5. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
6. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.
c. Tee covers.
d. Flange and union covers.
e. End caps.
f. Beveled collars.
g. Valve covers.
h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.
E. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil-thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane
for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous
resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum-foil facing.
1. Products:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-10
a. Polyguard; Alumaguard 60.
F. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with
a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5
and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
1. Products:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film.
G. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film
with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index
of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
1. Products:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
H. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive
covered by a removable protective strip.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 6 mils.
3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 500 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-11
D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 5 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Film Thickness: 4 mils.
3. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.
4. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020
inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal.
B. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting
spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated
when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
2. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
3. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to
bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers,
and substrates.
C. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position
indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
2. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up
to 2-1/2 inches.
3. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to
bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers,
and substrates.
D. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of
holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is
in place. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
2. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-12
3. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
E. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized-steel
sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2
inches in diameter.
1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure
permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
F. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick nylon
sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2
inches in diameter.
G. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
H. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
2.11 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according
to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements
for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of
voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves,
and specialties.
B. Install insulation with tightly butted joints free of voids and gaps. Vapor barriers shall be
continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-13
C. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry
state.
E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
G. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
K. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in
insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs
from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal
ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material
manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
L. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and
dry film thicknesses.
M. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4
inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with
outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends
adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-14
N. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
O. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to
thermal movement.
P. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt
joints.
Q. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof
flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with
sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2
inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-15
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves
for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent
insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For
penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and
externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap
damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for
100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches
o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor
barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier
consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at
joints, seams, and protrusions.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-16
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier
seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover
insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation
thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At
end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for
each surface.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-
inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for
100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches
o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor
barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier
consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at
joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier
seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-
foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover
insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation
thickness but not less than 3 inches.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-17
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for
each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside
radius of elbows.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-
inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for
100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including
contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of
tanks and vessels as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service temperature and
with substrate.
c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end
joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and
vessels.
f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material
compatible with insulation materials.
6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where
insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation.
Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps,
turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment
approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential
girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center
openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest
circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment
or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with
tie wire or bands.
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.
8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes,
and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.
9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.
10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply vapor-barrier mastic to open
ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. Create a facing lap for longitudinal
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-18
seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation
segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1
inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-
barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. Repair punctures, tears, and
penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over
entire surface of tanks and vessels.
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:
1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints
with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-
inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch-diameter fasteners with wing nuts.
Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.
2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.040 inch thick.
3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal
between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.
3.6 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific
requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Secure single-layer insulation with bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming
insulation materials.
C. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer
with 0.062-inch wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with bands at 12-inch intervals.
D. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of insulating cement and coat with a mastic. Install
vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services.
Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped
contour.
F. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and
polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.
Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC
tape.
G. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and
color of pipe labels.
H. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-19
1. Secure each layer of preformed insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3
and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with
vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs
but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic.
5. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
I. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of same insulation material and thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1
inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
5. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
J. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against
adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces
with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with
adjoining pipe insulation.
2. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each
section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
K. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material,
density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less
than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts.
Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation.
4. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-20
by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is
thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so
strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the
insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient
services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
5. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
L. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test
connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and
equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with
insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
M. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness
as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from
flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation
on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum
bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the
two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered
blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to
flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each
side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating
cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is
dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces
with a metal jacket.
N. Special Installation Requirements for Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Insulation:
1. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
2. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
a. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
b. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice
the thickness of pipe insulation.
c. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness
as pipe insulation.
d. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
3. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
a. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-21
b. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end
joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with
vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints;
for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels.
Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish
bead along seam and joint edge.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c.
and at end joints.
D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to
pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.
2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end
overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap
at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and
then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.
3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive
or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to
manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to
maintain a permanent bond.
4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an
outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch-circumference limit allows
for 2-inch-overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be
installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for
"fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.
5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and
wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-22
3.8 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket as
specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
1. Apply two finish coats of interior, flat, latex-emulsion size over a primer that is compatible
with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of
the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum jackets.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and
insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited
to one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General"
Article.
2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied
jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall
be limited to one location for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation
Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine
compliance.
3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-
applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded
fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of
welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for
each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work.
C. Install new insulation and jackets to replace insulation and jackets removed for inspection. Repeat
inspection procedures after new materials are installed.
3.10 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and plenums.
2. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.
B. Items Not Insulated:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-23
1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Vibration-control devices.
6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct Insulation (in residential areas, conditioned space): Mineral-fiber
blanket, 1 inches thick and 3.00-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
B. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct Insulation (in residential areas, unconditioned space): Mineral-fiber
blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 3.00-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Concealed, Return-Air Duct Insulation (in residential areas, conditioned space): Mineral-fiber
blanket, 1 inches thick and 3.00-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
D. Concealed, Return-Air Duct Insulation (in residential areas, unconditioned space): Mineral-fiber
blanket, 1 inches thick and 3.00-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
E. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct Insulation (in commercial areas, conditioned space): Mineral-fiber
blanket, 1 inches thick and 3.00-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
F. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct Insulation (in commercial areas, unconditioned space): Mineral-fiber
blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 3.00-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
G. Concealed, Return-Air Duct Insulation (in commercial areas, conditioned space): Mineral-fiber
blanket, 1 inches thick and 3.00-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
H. Concealed, Return-Air Duct Insulation (in commercial areas, unconditioned space): Mineral-fiber
blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 3.00-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
I. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct Insulation Wrapped: Foil backed Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick
and reflectivity 0.096.
3.12 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a
type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
C. Heating-Hot-Water Pump Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 2 inches thick.
D. Heating-Hot-Water Expansion/Compression Tank Insulation: Mineral-fiber pipe and tank, 1 inch
thick.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-24
E. Heating-Hot-Water Air-Separator Insulation: Mineral-fiber pipe and tank, 2 inches thick.
F. Domestic Hot-Water Storage Tank Insulation: Mineral-fiber pipe and tank, 4 inches thick.
G. Domestic Water Storage Tank Insulation: Mineral-fiber pipe and tank, 4 inches thick.
3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each
piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection
from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Fire-suppression piping.
2. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
3. Below-grade piping.
4. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick.
B. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies: Flexible elastomeric, 1/2 inch thick.
C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures
for People with Disabilities: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick.
D. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: Mineral-fiber pipe insulation, Type I, 1-1/2
inches thick.
E. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below: Mineral-fiber, preformed pipe,
Type I, 1-1/2 inch thick.
3.15 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-
applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Ducts, Concealed:
1. None.
2. PVC, 20 mils thick.
3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 230700-25
D. Ducts, Exposed:
1. None.
2. PVC, 20 mils thick.
3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick.
E. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches:
1. None.
2. PVC, 20 mils thick.
3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick.
F. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72
Inches:
1. None.
2. Painted aluminum, smooth with 1-1/4-inch-deep corrugations thick.
G. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
2. PVC, 20 mils thick.
3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick.
H. Piping, Exposed:
1. None.
2. PVC, 20 milsthick.
3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 230700
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-1
SECTION 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
B. See Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that relate
to this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each control device indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Schematic flow diagrams.
2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams.
3. Details of control panel faces.
4. Damper schedule.
5. Valve schedule.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-2
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Alerton Inc.
2. Andover Controls Corporation.
3. Automated Logic Corporation.
4. Heat-Timer Corporation.
5. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control.
6. Invensys Building Systems.
7. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group.
8. KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company.
9. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
10. Staefa Control System Inc.; Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
11. tekmar Control Systems, Inc.
12. Crestron
13. Daikin AC control system + iTouch
B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating
in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control
mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color
graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-
click graphics.
2.3 UNITARY CONTROLLERS
A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system,
database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application.
1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and
processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory
with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.
2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real
and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling
with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report
failures.
3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.
2.4 ANALOG CONTROLLERS
A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated
by electric motor.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-3
B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning
action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg, and
single- or double-pole contacts.
C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for
remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and
authority.
1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control
readjustment potentiometer.
D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of motor
speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed.
Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to
minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference.
2.5 TIME CLOCKS
A. Manufacturers:
1. ATC-Diversified Electronics.
2. Paragon Electric Co., Inc.
3. Precision Multiple Controls, Inc.
4. SSAC Inc.; ABB USA.
5. Time Mark Corporation.
B. Seven-day, programming-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and seven-day dial;
continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, eight-hour, power-failure carryover; multiple-
switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two normally open and
two normally closed output contacts.
2.6 ELECTRONIC SENSORS
A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.
B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:
1. Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. Ebtron, Inc.
c. Heat-Timer Corporation.
d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
e. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
f. RDF Corporation.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.
3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-4
5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature
stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.
6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion length
of 2-1/2 inches.
7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
a. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.
b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.
c. Thermometer: Exposed Red-reading glass.
d. Color: White.
e. Orientation: Vertical.
8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws.
C. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. General Eastern Instruments.
c. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.
e. TCS/Basys Controls.
f. Vaisala.
2. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and
temperature compensated.
a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.
b. Output: 4 to 20 mA.
c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg.
d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg.
3. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service;
minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.
4. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for
service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear output 4 to 20
mA.
5. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with
suitable scale range and differential.
6. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas or liquid service; range suitable for system; linear
output 4 to 20 mA.
D. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
1. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.
2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.
3. Thermometer: Exposed.
4. Color: White.
5. Orientation: Vertical.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-5
E. Room sensor accessories include the following:
1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls.
2. Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base.
3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.
2.7 STATUS SENSORS
A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range
of 0- to 5-inch wg.
B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable
pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.
C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core
transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor
current.
D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered
transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.
E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current
transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent
error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.
F. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current
and system output requirements.
G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V
dc, feedback signal.
H. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating,
stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250,
Type 1 enclosure.
1. Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
I. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual-level detectors using solid-state plug-in
sensors with a 3-year minimum life; suitable over a temperature range of 32 to 104 deg F; with 2
factory-calibrated alarm levels at 35 and 200 ppm.
2.8 THERMOSTATS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Erie Controls.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-6
2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div.
3. Heat-Timer Corporation.
4. Sauter Controls Corporation.
5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc.
6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc.
7. Daikin AC
B. Electric, solid-state, room thermostat.
1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.
2. Two stage heating with time delay or adjustable dead band between stages.
3. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.
4. Set up for four separate temperatures per day.
5. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days.
6. Short-cycle protection.
7. Programming based on weekday, Saturday, and Sunday.
8. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard
disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto.
9. Battery replacement without program loss.
10. Thermostat display features include the following:
a. Time of day.
b. Actual room temperature.
c. Programmed temperature.
d. Programmed time.
e. Duration of timed override.
f. Day of week.
g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."
C. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type,
with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point
range, and 2 deg F. maximum differential.
D. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in
ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.
2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields.
3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements, extended to
cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported.
4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of
instrument.
5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by
application.
6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is
removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.
E. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with
adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-7
F. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable set
point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent pressure gage,
remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.
G. Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with molded-
rubber diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff
pressure of 25 psig, and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob.
2.9 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action
or two-position action.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and
sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings
designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or
feedback potentiometer.
3. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway
torque of 150 in. x lbf.
4. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway
torque of 150 in. x lbf.
B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated
torque.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure.
3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
b. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500
fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.
4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear
release on nonspring-return actuators.
7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.
8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.
9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal.
10. Temperature Rating: [Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.
11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F.
12. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-8
2.10 CONTROL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div.
2. Erie Controls.
3. Neles-Jamesbury.
4. Sauter Controls Corporation.
B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum
pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition
disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged
ends, and renewable seat and disc.
3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats.
a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top
and bottom.
b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces
for plugs on top and bottom.
4. Sizing: 5-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following:
a. Two Position: Line size.
b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure
drop, whichever is more.
c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value
specified above.
5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way
valves shall have linear characteristics.
6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide
minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-way
valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system
(pump) head.
D. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig, maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or ASTM A 536
ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or
Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
1. Body Style: Wafer.
2. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron.
3. Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
E. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated,
replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-9
1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.
2. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff
head.
3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way
valves shall have linear characteristics.
F. Self-Contained Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated,
replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.
1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.
2. Thermostatic Operator: Wax-filled integral sensor with integral adjustable dial.
2.11 DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance Inc.
2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div.
3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.).
4. United Enertech Corp.
5. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch-minimum thick, galvanized-steel
or 0.125-inch-minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper
blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8
inches and length of 48 inches.
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon
blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against
spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 25 to plus 200 deg F.
3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene.
4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber
blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm
per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque
of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.
2.12 CONTROL CABLE
A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 27 Section
"Communications Horizontal Cabling."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify location of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details
before installation. Install devices to be ADA compliant.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-10
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
B. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
1. Entrances.
2. Public areas.
C. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section
"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
F. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section
"Hydronic Piping."
G. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts.
H. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27 Section "Communications
Horizontal Cabling."
I. Coordinate Daikin Control Panels and additional radiant floor thermostats installation with
Audio/Visual subcontractor.
3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
B. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "Communications
Horizontal Cabling."
1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are
exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in raceway.
3. Install concealed cable in raceway.
4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several
cables follow a common path.
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system,
except local individual room control cables.
7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of
piping and equipment.
C. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic
duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-11
D. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in
hand position.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,
provide factory start-up and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with
compatible signal generator.
4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set
points are as required.
5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of
operation. Adjust PID actions.
6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
7. Test software and hardware interlocks.
C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 230900
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 1
SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
B. See Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control equipment and
devices and for submittal requirements.
1.2 HEATING SYSTEM CONTROL SEQUENCE
A. On any call for space heating or snowmelting, the boilers, B-1 & B-2, and their respective
pumps, P-1 & P-2, shall start in a lead/lag configuration. The boilers shall then modulate to
maintain a 140 deg. F supply water temperature. Provide outdoor reset, max water supply
temperature at 140 deg. F.
B. On a call for space heating, the variable speed pump, P-4, shall start and run to maintain a
constant differential pressure across the supply and return mains.
C. All heating coils shall have ON/OFF 2-way valves except for HRV, where modulating 2-way
valve shall be installed.
D. When the temperature in WH-1 drops below 120 deg F as measured by its aquastat, P-1 shall
stop, P-3 shall start, and B-1 shall ramp up to provide 180 deg F leaving water temperature.
Once the temperature in WH-1 reaches 140 deg F, P-3 shall stop, and P-1 & B-1 shall return to
normal operation.
E. On a call for heating in public restrooms the respective telestatic manifolds in RM-1 and heating
pump P-4 shall be enabled.
F. HC-1 shall be controlled via duct mounted air discharge sensor. When the air temperature drops
below 70 deg. F (adj.) the HC-1’s 2-way valve shall open and modulate to maintain discharge
air temperature at 80 deg. F (adj.). Heating pump P-4 shall be enabled when HC-1 calls for
heating.
1.3 SNOWMELTING CONTROL SEQUENCE
A. The snowmelting system shall be controlled by a Tekmar controller and an associated
combination socket/sensor.
B. When the outdoor temperature is below 40 deg F, pumps, P-5 & P-6 shall cycle to maintain a
slab temperature of 28 deg F.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 2
C. When the outdoor temperature is below 32 deg F and moisture is detected on the slab, pump, P-
5, shall start and run continuously and P-6 shall cycle to maintain a slab temperature of 38 deg.
F until the slab is dry.
1.4 COOLING CONTROL SEQUENCE
A. On any call for cooling from the chilled water coils the chiller CH-1, and its pump, P-7, shall
both start and run. The chiller shall modulate its capacity to provide a chilled water supply
temperature of 44 deg F. The constant speed pump, P-7, shall start and constantly run when the
outdoor temperature rises above 40 deg. F (adj.).
B. All cooling coils shall have modulating 2-way valves.
1.5 EXHAUST & VENTILATION SEQUENCE
A. When the temperature in the mechanical room exceeds 90 deg F (adj.), the associated exhaust
fan EF-2 shall start and run.
B. HRV-1 shall be operated via a motion sensor in each public restroom. Whichever sensor calls,
the units shall constantly run and provide ventilation in the restrooms. During unoccupied
periods HRV shall cycle for every 20 minutes (adj.).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 230993
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-1
SECTION 231123 NATURAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fuel gas piping within the building. Products include the following:
1. Pipe, tube, fittings, and joining materials.
2. Protective pipe and fitting coating.
3. Piping specialties.
4. Specialty valves.
5. Pressure regulators.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For fuel gas piping. Include plans and attachments to other work.
1. Include wiring diagrams.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-2
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
B. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing Systems: Comply with AGA LC 1 and include the following:
1. Tubing: Corrugated stainless steel with plastic jacket or coating.
2. Fittings: Copper alloy with ends made to fit corrugated tubing. Include ends with threads
according to ASME B1.20.1 if connection to threaded pipe or fittings is required.
3. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M; Type E or S; Grade B; black. Wall thickness of wrought-steel pipe
shall comply with ASME B36.10M.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded
ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to
ASME B1.20.1.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and
threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
4. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
5. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
2.3 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in
contact with materials that may corrode the pipe.
2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.
B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector.
2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Valve End Connections: Threaded, according to ASME B1.20.1.
B. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and CSA International listed.
C. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball
type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel disc and
fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig minimum pressure rating.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-3
D. Gas Valves: ASME B16.33 and CSA International-listed bronze body and 125-psig pressure rating.
E. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21, with electrical operator for actuation by appliance automatic
shutoff device.
1. Manufacturers:
a. ASCO General Controls.
b. ASCOLECTRIC, Ltd.
c. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson.
d. Dungs, Karl, Inc.
e. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.
f. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
g. GPS Gas Protection Systems Inc.
h. Honeywell International Inc.
i. Johnson Controls.
F. Electrically Operated Gas Valves: UL 429, bronze, aluminum, or cast-iron body solenoid valve;
120-V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil. Include NEMA ISC 6, Type 4, coil
enclosure and electrically opened and closed dual coils. Valve position shall normally be closed.
1. Manufacturers:
a. ASCO General Controls.
b. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson.
c. Dungs, Karl, Inc.
d. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
e. Goyen Valve Corp.; Tyco Environmental Systems.
f. Magnatrol Valve Corp.
g. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Skinner Valve Div.
h. Watts Industries, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping. Perform
leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all equipment is turned
off in affected piping section.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Use flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fuel Gas Piping, 2 psig or Less:
1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
3. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-4
C. Fuel Gas Piping 2 to 5 psig:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop.
B. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig: Gas stop or gas valve.
C. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.
D. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements and piping joint construction are specified in Division 23
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Install pressure gage downstream from each service pressure regulator. Pressure gages are specified
in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages."
C. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit
constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside
and terminate with screened vent cap.
1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to
approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums.
Do not locate valves above ceilings.
2. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from physical
damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.
3. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in Part 2
"Protective Coating" Article may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of
authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or
trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.
D. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of
service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where
condensate would be subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size
as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or
cap.
E. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings unless specifically
shown to be exposed to view.
F. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-5
G. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
H. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
I. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
J. Install corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move.
K. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated valve.
L. Install pressure gage downstream from each line pressure regulator. Pressure gages are specified in
Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages."
M. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections.
N. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to
atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant
insect screens in large end.
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
C. Install hangers for horizontal corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. Option: Support tubing from structure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance. Connect piping to appliances
using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each
appliance. Install union downstream from valve.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Test, inspect, and purge piping according to NFPA 54 and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory
results are obtained.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-6
END OF SECTION 231123
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-1
SECTION 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties
for the following:
1. Hot-water heating piping.
2. Radiant floor and snow melt piping.
3. Condensate-drain piping.
B. See Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Pressure-seal fittings
2. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-
orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.
3. Air control devices.
4. Chemical treatment.
5. Hydronic specialties.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports
for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the
building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as
indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness
or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with
copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working
temperatures and pressures.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint,
plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-3
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Hart Industries International, Inc.
d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division.
3. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Couplings:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
3. Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends;
and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 VALVES
A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23
Section "Valves."
B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements
specified in Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."
C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
c. Flow Design Inc.
d. Gerand Engineering Co.
e. Griswold Controls.
f. Taco.
g. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company of America
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-4
4. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.
5. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
6. Plug: Resin.
7. Seat: PTFE.
8. End Connections: Threaded or socket.
9. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
10. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
11. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
12. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
c. Flow Design Inc.
d. Gerand Engineering Co.
e. Griswold Controls.
f. Taco.
4. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.
5. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
6. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
7. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
8. Seat: PTFE.
9. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
10. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
11. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
12. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
13. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
E. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-5
f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
4. Body: Bronze or brass.
5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
6. Seat: Brass.
7. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
8. Diaphragm: EPT.
9. Low inlet-pressure check valve.
10. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.
11. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
12. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed, with
operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
F. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
4. Body: Bronze or brass.
5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
6. Seat: Brass.
7. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
8. Diaphragm: EPT.
9. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.
10. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.
11. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
12. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating
pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
G. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-6
a. Flow Design Inc.
b. Griswold Controls.
4. Body: Brass or ferrous metal.
5. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable.
6. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve.
7. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.
8. Size: Same as pipe in which installed.
9. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure
fluctuations.
10. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig.
11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F.
2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Amtrol, Inc.
2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
4. Taco.
C. Manual Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
6. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
D. ASME Expansion Tanks:
1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 150-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating
temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass.
Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and
stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter. Provide
tank fittings for 150-psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature.
3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure and 240
deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain
water, and close off system.
4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch-diameter gage glass, and
slotted-metal glass guard.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-7
E. In-Line Air Separators:
1. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to
maximize air separation.
2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.
3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.
2.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity;
with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent
accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.
B. Ethylene and Propylene Glycol: Industrial grade with corrosion inhibitors and environmental-
stabilizer additives for mixing with water in systems indicated to contain antifreeze or glycol
solutions.
2.8 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent
free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.
3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
4. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
C. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-8
B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and
flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
C. Hot-Water Heating Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K, annealed-temper
copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints.
D. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and
soldered joints.
E. A hybrid combination of copper / HePex system is an acceptable deduct alternate hydronic piping
system. All piping 1-1/2” and larger shall be installed in type “L” copper. All piping ion areas
where rigidity is required shall be installed in copper, i.e., at shower heads.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to
each piece of equipment.
B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.
C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.
D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors;
and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.
F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate
friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-9
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of
valves.
L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with
cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the
bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "Valves."
Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment,
and elsewhere as indicated.
R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as
indicated.
S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line
pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of
strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller
than NPS 2.
T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in
Division 23 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."
U. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.
B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
C. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-10
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feetor longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported
on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with
copper pipe.
D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.
Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free
solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,
using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading
is specified.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-11
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
H. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and
procedure, and brazed joints.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for
system air venting.
B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent
upward slope toward tank.
C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger.
D. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top
of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line,
from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections.
Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size,
full-port, ball valve.
E. Install ASME expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge
tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.
1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose.
2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank,
piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and
structural members.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment
connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed,
only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to
Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-12
3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and
detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum
of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.
B. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of
operation.
C. Fill systems indicated to have antifreeze or glycol solutions with the following concentrations:
1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: Minimum 30 percent propylene glycol.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer
screens.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains
installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's
working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump,
valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of
vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times
"SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints,
and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. Perform the following before operating the system:
1. Open manual valves fully.
2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.
3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-13
4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely
(automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,
cooling towers, to specified values.
7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 232113
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-1
SECTION 232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps and wet rotor circulators.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics,
furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated.
Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for
installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-2
2.2 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.
2. Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group.
3. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries.
4. Grundfos Pumps Corporation.
5. Taco, Inc.
B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in-line
pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts
mounted horizontally or vertically. Rate pump for 125-psig minimum working pressure and a
continuous water temperature of 200 deg F.
C. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings
at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion-flange connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and
secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance.
3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring,
and bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.
5. Packing Seal: Stuffing box, with a minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided
yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.
6. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.
D. Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and
rigidly mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Motors."
2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet
fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless-steel
straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory-fabricated support.
B. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-
discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.
Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-3
C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight
of pumps is not supported by piping.
D. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of sufficient size to support pump
weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and
Seismic Controls." Fabricate brackets or supports as required. Hanger and support materials are
specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."
E. Suspend vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps independent of piping. Install pumps with
motor and pump shafts vertical. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of
sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 23
Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Hanger and support materials are specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."
3.2 ALIGNMENT
A. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1-1.5,
"Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
E. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install
single gage with multiple input selector valve.
F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."
END OF SECTION 232123
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers.
2. ARI 710 - Liquid-Line Driers.
3. ARI 730 - Flow-Capacity Rating and Application of Suction-Line Filters and Filter Dryers.
4. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves.
5. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile Refrigerants.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
2. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
3. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
4. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.
E. American Welding Society:
1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.
2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
F. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or
couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or
threaded connections to valves or equipment.
B. Provide receivers on systems if recommended by equipment supplier.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 2
C. Flexible Connectors: Use at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb
vibration.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:
1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.
2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.
3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop based on manufacturer's test data.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and
fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil
traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show
interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design
actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes
to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between
compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and
compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
C. Field quality-control test reports. Indicate results of refrigerant leak test.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining
procedures and isolation.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Welding Certificates.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
1.7 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior
and exterior are clean when installed.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B280, drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
2. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range
1190 to 1480 degrees F.
2.2 UNIONS, FLANGES, CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
A. 2 inches and Smaller:
1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig malleable iron, threaded.
2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.
B. Conform to ASME B31.5
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split
ring.
D. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
E. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
F. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks.
H. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
I. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.
J. Floor Support for Hot Pipe 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut,
nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
K. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel rings, adjustable, copper plated.
L. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
M. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection
with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to
suit threaded hanger rods.
N. Sheet Lead: ASTM B749.
O. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced
protective jacket.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 4
2. End Connections: Socket ends.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-
long assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
2.3 VALVES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:
1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet solder or flared ends.
2. Phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and hand wheel.
3. Stainless steel spring, nylon seats, disc with positive back seating.
4. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
5. Maximum working temperature: 275 degrees F.
B. Packed Angle Valves:
1. Forged brass or nickel-plated forged steel, solder or flared ends.
2. Forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat, molded stem packing.
3. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
4. Maximum working temperature: 275 degrees F.
C. Ball Valves:
1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions,
brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals,
soldered or threaded ends.
2. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
3. Maximum working temperature: 325 degrees F.
D. Service Valves:
1. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball
check valve, flared or solder ends.
2. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
E. Refrigerant Check Valves:
1. Globe Type:
a. Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide
and disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc.
b. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
c. Maximum working temperature: 300 degrees F.
2. Straight Through Type:
a. Spring, neoprene seat.
b. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
c. Maximum working temperature: 250 degrees F.
F. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 5
5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location
with 1/2-inch conduit adapter and 24-V ac coil.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
8. Manual operator.
G. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled
by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.
2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
2.4 REFRIGERANT STRAINERS
A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type:
1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of
stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass.
2. Maximum working pressure: 430 psig.
B. Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type:
1. Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire screen.
2.5 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting or pilot operated with remote pressure pilot,
adjustable over 0 to 80 psig range, for maximum working pressure of 450 psig.
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper
socket fittings on copper pipe.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
2.6 REFRIGERANTS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 6
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc.
2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.
4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.
C. ASHRAE 34, R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper,
Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
B. Suction Lines NPS 4 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper,
Type K or L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper
fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
D. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type K or L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper
fittings with soldered joints.
E. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-
copper fittings with soldered joints.
3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A. NOT APPLICABLE
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 7
E. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
I. Refer to Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of
Operations for HVAC Controls" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of
operation.
J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and
specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or
panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment
requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.
L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.
M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical
injury.
N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve
stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near expansion-valve bulb.
P. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation.
Q. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."
R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
HVAC Piping."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 8
T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
B. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper
pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper
pipe.
C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
7. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 9
1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
2. Test refrigerant piping and specialties. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and
safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure.
3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the
pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of
test.
c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount
of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum
holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system
design temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow
rates and pressures are established.
END OF SECTION 232300
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 - 1
SECTION 232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following boiler water-treatment systems:
1. Bypass chemical-feed equipment and controls.
2. Chemical treatment test equipment.
3. HVAC water-treatment chemicals.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Water quality for boiler systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth
for optimum efficiency of boiler equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or
the environment.
B. Base boiler water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, the boiler system
equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating
personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating, shall have the following water qualities:
1. pH: Maintain a value within 7 to 9.
2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.
3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.
4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm.
5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.
6. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm.
7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
9. Microbiological Limits:
a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/ml.
b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.
c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.
d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 - 2
B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemical treatment equipment showing tanks, maintenance
space required, and piping connections to HVAC systems. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Other Informational Submittals:
1. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the
application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in the "Performance
Requirements" Article above.
2. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.
3. Passivation Confirmation Report: Verify passivation of galvanized-steel surfaces, and
confirm this observation in a letter to Architect.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-
treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment
equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Ampion Corp.
2. Anderson Chemical Co, Inc.
3. Aqua-Chem, Inc.; Cleaver-Brooks Div.
4. Barclay Chemical Co.; Water Management, Inc.
5. Boland Trane Services.
6. GE Betz.
7. GE Osmonics.
8. H-O-H Chemicals, Inc.
9. Metro Group. Inc. (The); Metropolitan Refining Div.
10. ONDEO Nalco Company.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 - 3
11. Watcon, Inc.
2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT
A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill
opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill
cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system
pressure in the vessel.
1. Capacity: 5 gal.
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 150 psig.
2.3 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Test Kit: Manufacturer-recommended equipment and chemicals in a wall-mounting cabinet for
testing pH, TDS, inhibitor, chloride, alkalinity, and hardness; sulfite and testable polymer tests
for high-pressure boilers, and oxidizing biocide test for open cooling systems.
B. Corrosion Test-Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosive-resistant material, complete with
piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from
mild steel coupon in the test-coupon assembly.
1. Two-station rack for closed-loop systems.
2.4 CHEMICALS
A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are
compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water
quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
B. Water Softener Chemicals:
1. Mineral: High-capacity, sulfonated-polystyrene ion-exchange resin that is stable over
entire pH range with good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or shock. Resin
exchange capacity minimum 30,000 grains/cu. ft. of calcium carbonate of resin when
regenerated with 15 lb of salt.
2. Salt for Brine Tanks: High-purity sodium chloride, free of dirt and foreign material.
Rock and granulated forms are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 - 4
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require
servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.
B. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.
C. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical treatment controls and sensors.
D. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits.
E. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating, and equipped
with the following:
1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
2. Install water meter in makeup water supply.
3. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
4. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder
inlet.
5. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal
piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Common
Work Results for HVAC."
D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty
valves are specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
E. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers
required in makeup water connections to potable-water systems.
F. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 26 Sections for connecting electrical
equipment.
G. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 - 5
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections.
2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been
cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing
chemicals for water-treatment system.
3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the
preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.
4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test
results are achieved.
5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for
each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until
it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before
it has been tested and approved.
7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects.
8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. At eight-week intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on
hydronic systems to show that automatic chemical-feed systems are maintaining water quality
within performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water
analysis advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article.
F. Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards:
1. Silica: ASTM D 859.
2. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.
3. Iron: ASTM D 1068.
4. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 - 6
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 232500
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METAL DUCTS 233113-1
SECTION 233113 METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal, rectangular ducts and fittings for supply, return, outside, and exhaust
air-distribution systems in low pressure classes.
B. See Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting
access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.
1. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
2. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable
materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METAL DUCTS 233113-2
metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other
imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to
view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized
sheet metal ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 DUCT LINER
A. Vinyl coated fiberglass, “K” value of 0.29 at 75° F, 2 lb/cu. ft. density, secured to the metal with a
solid coat of adhesive, vinyl coated side to the air stream.
B. Insulation thickness: 1” unless otherwise noted on drawings.
2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
B. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified
acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured,
UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl
sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
E. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs
more than 4 inches thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METAL DUCTS 233113-3
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized
rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with
duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and complying with
requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types
and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class
required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's
guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Nexus Inc.
c. Ward Industries, Inc.
C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Lockformer.
2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger
and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are
lined.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METAL DUCTS 233113-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:
1. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg.
2. Supply Ducts (in Mechanical Equipment Rooms): 2-inch wg.
3. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
4. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
5. Laundry clothes dryer venting: .5- inch wg.
3.2 DUCT LINER
A. Duct sizes shown on drawings for lined duct are clear opening inside lining.
B. Internally line the following duct:
1. All concealed supply air duct.
2. All transfer ducts.
3. Other locations as shown on drawings.
3.3 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3
screws in each coupling.
E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to
building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
H. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless
specifically indicated.
I. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and
similar finished work.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METAL DUCTS 233113-5
J. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to
cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical
equipment spaces and enclosures.
L. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct
insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by
at least 1-1/2 inches.
M. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,
install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers
are specified in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation
methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
N. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.
O. All laundry clothes dryer vent ductwork shall be constructed from aluminum sheet metal.
3.4 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
C. Laundry clothes dryer vent shall be connected and sealed without the use of penetrating sheet metal
screws.
3.5 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.
C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure
(proof-test) load.
D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs
less than 4 inches thick.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 METAL DUCTS 233113-6
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Duct
Accessories."
a. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible"
for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
END OF SECTION 233113
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-1
SECTION 233300 DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
2. Manual volume dampers.
3. Motor operated Control dampers.
4. Flange connectors.
5. Turning vanes.
6. Duct-mounted access doors.
7. Flexible connectors.
8. Flexible ducts.
9. Duct accessory hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to
other work.
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include
dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct
systems and other construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings.
b. Manual volume damper installations.
c. Control damper installations.
d. Fire-damper and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted
access doors.
e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable
materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet
metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other
imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a finish for
concealed ducts and finish for exposed ducts.
D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for
concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized
sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4. Duro Dyne Inc.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. Lloyd Industries, Inc.
7. Nailor Industries Inc.
8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
9. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
10. Ruskin Company.
11. SEMCO Incorporated.
12. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Description: Gravity balanced.
C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.
D. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-3
E. Frame: 0.052-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch-thick, roll-
formed aluminum with sealed edges.
G. Blade Action: Parallel.
H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.
I. Blade Axles:
1. Material: Galvanized steel.
2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.
J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L. Bearings: Steel ball.
M. Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Chain pulls.
5. Front of rear screens.
6. 90-degree stops.
N. Sleeve: Minimum 20-gage thickness.
2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
d. McGill AirFlow LLC.
e. METALAIRE, Inc.
f. Nailor Industries Inc.
g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inc.
j. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-4
a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.
b. Mitered and welded corners.
c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings:
a. Stainless-steel sleeve.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length
of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
d. McGill AirFlow LLC.
e. METALAIRE, Inc.
f. Nailor Industries Inc.
g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inc.
j. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch-thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for
attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch-thick aluminum sheet.
e. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings:
a. Stainless-steel sleeve.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-5
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length
of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
C. Jackshaft:
1. Size: 1-inch diameter.
2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at
each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
D. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and
a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4. Duro Dyne Inc.
5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
6. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
7. Lloyd Industries, Inc.
8. M&I Air Systems Engineering; Division of M&I Heat Transfer Products Ltd.
9. McGill AirFlow LLC.
10. METALAIRE, Inc.
11. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc.
12. Nailor Industries Inc.
13. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
14. Ruskin Company.
15. Vent Products Company, Inc.
16. Young Regulator Company.
B. Frames:
1. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.
2. Mitered and welded corners.
C. Blades:
1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches.
2. Opposed-blade design.
3. Galvanized steel.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-6
4. 0.064 inch thick.
5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging.
6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and
brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.
1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
E. Bearings:
1. Stainless-steel sleeve.
2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of
damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,
gaskets, and components.
C. Material: Galvanized steel.
D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.6 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. METALAIRE, Inc.
4. SEMCO Incorporated.
5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars
perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces
and fibrous-glass fill.
C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded
fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane
runners suitable for duct mounting.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-7
D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
E. Vane Construction: Single wall.
F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger
dimensions.
2.7 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
4. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
5. McGill AirFlow LLC.
6. Nailor Industries Inc.
7. Ventfabrics, Inc.
8. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-
11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular.
b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure
class.
c. Vision panel.
d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.
d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression latches
with outside and inside handles.
C. Pressure Relief Access Door:
1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
2. Door: Single wall with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-8
3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure ducts.
4. Factory set at 10-inch wg.
5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.
6. Hinge: Continuous piano.
7. Latches: Cam.
8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.
9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch-thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.8 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Flame Gard, Inc.
3. 3M.
B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.
D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for
minimum 2000 deg F.
F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips
of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets.
Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-9
F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.
G. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression,
and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30
degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start
and stop.
2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. McGill AirFlow LLC.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-
steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.
C. Flexible Duct Connectors:
1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-
gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive.
2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and
gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-
insulation thickness.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-10
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and
grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from
larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat
channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.
H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
3. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief
access doors; and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers
and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
4. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.
5. Upstream of turning vanes.
6. Elsewhere as indicated.
I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
J. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-11
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
K. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
M. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded
vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct.
Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
O. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low-pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch
lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive.
Q. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
R. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust
limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of
fans.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed.
3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-
response device is installed.
END OF SECTION 233300
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.
2. Louver face diffusers.
3. Adjustable bar registers and grilles.
4. Fixed face registers and grilles.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents,
whether or not they are connected to ducts.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Louver Face Diffuser “C”:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Krueger.
b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
c. Price Industries.
d. Titus.
2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.
3. Material: Steel
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 2
4. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
5. Face Size: 24x24.
6. Mounting: Lay-in T bar.
7. Pattern: 4-cone.
8. Dampers: none
9. Accessories:
a. Square to round neck adaptor.
b. Adjustable pattern vanes.
c. Throw reducing vanes.
d. Equalizing grid.
e. Plaster ring.
f. Safety chain.
g. Wire guard.
h. Sectorizing baffles.
i. Operating rod extension.
2.2 REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. Adjustable Bar Grille ”A”:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Krueger.
b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
c. Price Industries.
d. Titus.
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
4. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart.
5. Core Construction: Integral.
6. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart.
7. Frame: 1 inch wide.
8. Mounting Frame: per manufacturer.
9. Mounting: Countersunk screw or Concealed.
10. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade.
11. Accessories:
a. Rear-blade gang operator.
B. Fixed Face Grille ”B”:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Krueger
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 3
b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
c. Price Industries.
d. Titus.
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
4. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 1/2 inch apart.
5. Core Construction: Integral.
6. Rear-Blade Arrangement: none.
7. Mounting Frame: per manufacturer
8. Mounting: Countersunk screw or Concealed.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 233713
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-1
SECTION 235216 CONDENSING BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled, gas-fired, water-tube condensing
boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified
professional engineer.
a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides
and rails and equipment mounting frames.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that boiler, accessories, and
components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. Source quality-control test reports.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and maintenance data.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-2
B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code.
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and
Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."
D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N,
"Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers."
E. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating
Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Pulse-Combustion Boilers:
a. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Shock: 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
b. Heat-Exchanger Corrosion: Nonprorated for five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Fire-Tube Condensing Boilers:
a. Leakage and Materials: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Nonprorated for five years
from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Water-Tube Condensing Boilers: 20 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Water-Jacketed Condensing Boilers:
a. Leakage and Materials: Eight years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Nonprorated for five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-3
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Lochinvar Corporation.
2. AERCO International.
3. Laars Heating Systems; a division of Waterpik Technologies, Inc.
4. Triangle Tube.
5. Wiessman.
2.2 TRIM
A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.1, "Power Piping or ANSI B31.9, "Building
Services Piping"
B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit.
C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated.
D. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch- diameter, combination water-pressure and -
temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges so normal operating
range is about 50 percent of full range.
E. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic.
F. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end gate valve.
G. Circulation Pump: Non-overloading, in-line pump with split-capacitor motor having thermal-
overload protection and lubricated bearings; designed to operate at specified boiler pressures and
temperatures.
2.3 CONTROLS
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
B. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:
1. Control transformer.
2. Set-Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable.
3. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to control burner
firing rate to maintain space temperature in response to thermostat with heat anticipator
located in heated space.
4. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to control burner
firing rate to reset supply-water temperature inversely with outside-air temperature. At 0
deg F outside-air temperature, set supply-water temperature at 140 deg F; at [60 deg F outside-
air temperature, set supply-water temperature at 140 deg F.
a. Include automatic, alternating-firing sequence for multiple boilers to ensure maximum
system efficiency throughout the load range and to provide equal runtime for boilers.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-4
C. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit
burner operation.
1. High Cutoff: Automatic reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler
design temperature.
2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water.
Cutoff switch shall be automatic-reset type.
3. Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual-reset pressure switch field mounted on boiler
combustion-air inlet.
4. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm for
above conditions.
2.4 ELECTRICAL POWER
A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 26 Sections.
B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers,
transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power
connection to boiler.
1. House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
2. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram.
3. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway.
4. Field power interface shall be to fused disconnect switch.
5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch or circuit
breaker.
6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.
2.5 VENTING KITS
A. Kit: Complete system, ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal, thimble,
indoor plate, vent adapter, condensate trap and dilution tank, and sealant.
B. Combustion-Air Intake: Complete system, stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal with screen, inlet air
coupling, and sealant.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide,
oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency;
perform hydrostatic test.
B. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 BOILER INSTALLATION
A. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 23 Section "Common
Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 03.
B. Vibration Isolation: Elastomeric isolation pads with a minimum static deflection of 0.25 inch.
Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.
D. Assemble and install boiler trim.
E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.
F. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.
C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full
size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.
D. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of
materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in Division 23
Section "Common Work Results for HVAC."
E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train
connection. Provide a reducer if required.
F. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or
flange at each connection.
G. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.
H. Boiler Venting:
1. Install flue venting kit and combustion-air intake.
2. Connect full size to boiler connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section
"Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks."
I. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-6
J. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air-
fuel ratio and combustion.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set points of
fuel supply, water level, and water temperature.
b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two
visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 235216
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 235523 - 1
SECTION 235523 - GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes gas-fired, tubular infrared radiant heaters.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of gas-fired radiant heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of gas-fired radiant heater that fails in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: provide to owner during pricing process.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TUBULAR INFRARED HEATERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Match existing manufacturer.
B. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired, and complying with
ANSI Z83.20/CSA 2.34.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 235523 - 2
C. Fuel Type: Existing
D. Combustion Tubing: 4-inch diameter steel with high-emissivity, high-temperature, corrosion-
resistant external finish.
E. Tubing Connections: Stainless-steel couplings or flared joints with stainless-steel draw bolts.
F. Reflector: Polished aluminum, 97 percent minimum reflectivity, with end caps. Shape to
control radiation from tubing for uniform intensity at floor level with 100 percent cutoff above
centerline of tubing. Provide for rotating reflector or heater around a horizontal axis for
minimum 30-degree tilt from vertical.
1. Reflector Extension Shields: Same material as reflectors, arranged for fixed connection
to lower reflector lip and rigid support to provide 100 percent cutoff of direct radiation
from tubing at angles greater than 30 degrees from vertical.
2. Include hanger kit.
G. Burner Safety Controls (if new provided, otherwise reuse existing):
1. Gas Control Valve: Single-stage, regulated redundant 24-V ac gas valve containing pilot
solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and
manual shutoff all in one body.
2. Blocked Vent Safety: Differential pressure switch in burner safety circuit to stop burner
operation with high discharge or suction pressure.
3. Control Panel Interlock: Stops burner if panel is open.
4. Indicator Lights: Burner-on indicator light.
H. Burner and Emitter Type (if new provided otherwise reuse existing): Gravity-vented power
burner, with the following features:
1. Emitter Tube: 4-inch diameter, hot-rolled-steel tubing with sight glass for burner and
pilot flame observation.
2. Venting: Connector at exit end of emitter tubing for vent-pipe connection.
a. Vent Terminal: Horizontal.
3. Burner/Ignition (if new provided otherwise reuse existing): Power gas burner with
electronic spark and electronic flame safety.
4. Burner/Ignition (if new provided otherwise reuse existing): Stainless-steel burner cup
and head with balanced-rotor draft fan.
5. Combustion-Air Connection: Duct connection for combustion air to be drawn directly
from outdoors by burner fan.
2.2 CONTROLS
A. Thermostat: Reuse existing
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 235523 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and connect gas-fired radiant heaters and associated fuel and vent features and systems
according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
B. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using chain hanger kits and building attachments.
C. Maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances to combustibles.
D. Install piping adjacent to gas-fired radiant heaters to allow service and maintenance.
E. Gas Piping: Reuse existing.
F. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
1. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory mounted.
G. Adjust initial temperature set points.
H. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections: Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
END OF SECTION 235523
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - 1
SECTION 235700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes plate heat exchangers.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Source quality-control reports.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BRAZED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. GEA PHE Systems North America Inc.
2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
3. Triangle Tube.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - 2
4. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.
5. Alfa Laval Inc.
B. Configuration: Brazed assembly consisting of embossed or pressed stainless-steel plates brazed
together and two end plates, one with threaded nozzles and one with pattern-embossed plates.
C. Construction: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
D. End-Plate Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
E. Threaded Nozzles: Type 316 stainless steel.
F. Plate Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
G. Brazing Material: Copper.
H. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. General:
a. Heat-Exchanger Surface Area: 49.9 sq. ft.
b. Heat Exchanged: see schedule on M1.0.
c. Operating Weight: see schedule on M1.0.
2. Hot Side:
a. Fluid: propylene glycol 30%
b. Working Pressure: 20 psig.
c. Water Flow Rate: see schedule on M1.0.
d. Pressure Drop: see schedule on M1.0
e. Inlet Temperature: see schedule on M1.0.
f. Outlet Temperature: see schedule on M1.0.
g. Fouling Factor: 0.00010.
h. Inlet Size: 1-1/2 MPT.
i. Outlet Size: 1-1/2 MPT.
3. Cold Side:
a. Fluid: propylene glycol 50%
b. Working Pressure: 20 psig.
c. Water Flow Rate: see schedule on M1.0.
d. Pressure Drop: see schedule on M1.0.
e. Inlet Temperature: see schedule on M1.0.
f. Outlet Temperature: see schedule on M1.0.
g. Fouling Factor: 0.00010.
h. Inlet Size: 1-1/2 MPT.
i. Outlet Size: 1-1/2 MPT.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - 3
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect heat exchangers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. Affix ASME label.
B. Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating
before shipment.
C. Heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install brazed-plate heat exchanger on custom-designed wall supports anchored to structure as
indicated on Drawings.
B. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for tube removal, service, and maintenance.
D. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat
exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers.
E. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections.
F. Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full
size of valve connection, to floor drain.
G. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger on inlet and outlet piping, and install thermometer on
heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in
Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
H. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping. Comply with requirements
for pressure gages specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
B. Heat exchanger will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - 4
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 235700
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313 - 1
SECTION 236313 - AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged, air-cooled refrigerant condensers for outdoor (louvered enclosure)
installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-
2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Carrier Corporation; Commercial HVAC Systems.
2. Colmac Coil Manufacturing, Inc.
3. Coolenheat Inc.
4. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
5. Engineered Air.
6. Heatcraft Refrigeration Products LLC.
7. McQuay International.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313 - 2
8. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies.
9. USA Coil & Air.
10. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Description:
1. Outdoor mounted, packaged, air-cooled remote condenser. Factory-assembled unit shall
consist of condenser coil, fan(s) and motor(s), mounting legs, factory wiring, piping and
controls, and a charge of dry nitrogen.
B. Refrigerant: R-134A.
C. Condenser Coil: Factory tested at 450 psig.
1. Tube: per manufacturer
2. Coil Fin: per manufacturer.
3. Coating: per manufacturer.
4. Circuit: To match compressors.
D. Unit Cabinet:
1. Cabinet shall be constructed of minimum 18 gage corrosion resistant zinc coated galvanized
steel and are capable of withstanding Federal test Method Standard No. 141 (Method 6061)
500-hour salt spray test. Optional heavy gage embossed aluminum shall be available.
2. Two-fan units shall be divided by full-width baffles to separate individual fan sections, pre-
vent air bypass, and provide additional casing rigidity.
3. Units 12 ton and larger shall be furnished with lifting holes to aid in rigging.
4. Panels for servicing shall be easily removable using a single wrench size.
5. Unit sizes 1 ton to 10 ton shall have minimum 12 gage galvanized steel mounting legs 15 in.
high and mounting rails. Legs shall be shipped with the unit for field assembly. Headers shall
be arranged for horizontal or vertical airflow.
6. Unit sizes 12 ton to 20 ton shall have minimum 10 gage galvanized steel legs 18 in. high and
12 gage base rail.
7. Unit shall be factory arranged for horizontal airflow. Headers shall have proper arrangement
and connection locations for correct refrigerant and oil return for the required airflow.
E. Fans:
1. Fans shall be propeller type, direct driven by weatherproof motors, and dynamically bal-
anced. Discharge side shall be protected by corrosion-resistant fan guards constructed of vi-
nyl coated close-mesh steel wire. Fans shall have dual square head set screws spaced 90 de-
grees apart that seat onto one.
F. Coils:
1. Coils shall use 3/8-in. OD copper tube with staggered aluminum fin (or optional copper tube
with copper fin, or be coated with polyester or E-coat flexible fin treatment as required) and
galvanized steel tube sheets. Fins shall be bonded to tubes by mechanical expansion. Hot gas
and liquid connections shall be made from the same end. Coil circuiting shall be single
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313 - 3
(100% capacity) or dual (50/50% capacity) circuit with or without a final pass subcooling cir-
cuit as required by the application. Fins shall not exceed 14 fins per inch.
1. Copper-fin coils shall be constructed of copperfins mechanically bonded to copper-
tubes and copper tube sheets. Galvanized steel tube sheets shall not be acceptable. A
polymer strip shall prevent coil assembly from contacting sheet metal coil pan to
minimize potential for galvanic corrosion between the coil and pan. All copper con-
struction shall provide protection in moderate coastal environments.
2. E-Coated aluminum-fin coils shall have a flexible epoxy polymer coating uniformly
applied to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins. Coating pro-
cess shall ensure complete coil encapsulation. Color shall be high gloss black with
gloss requirements of 60° of 65 to 90% per ASTM D523-89. Uniform dry film thick-
ness from 0.8 to 1.2 mil on all surface areas including fin edges. Superior hardness
characteristics of 2H per ASTM D3363-92A and cross hatch adhesion of 4B-5B per
ASTM D3359-93. Impact resistance shall be up to 160 in./lb (ASTM D2794-93).
Humidity and water immersion resistance shall be up to a minimum of 1000 and 250
hours respectively (ASTM D2247-92 and ASTM D870-92). Corrosion durability
shall be confirmed through testing to no less than 1000 hours salt spray per ASTM
B117-90. Coil construction shall be aluminum-fins mechanically bonded to copper
tubes.
1. E-Coated copper-fin coils shall have a flexible epoxy polymer coating uniformly ap-
plied to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins. Coating process
shall ensure complete coil encapsulation. Color shall be high gloss black with gloss
requirements of 60° of 65 to 90% per ASTM D523-89. Uniform dry film thickness
from 0.8 to 1.2 mil on all surface areas including fin edges. Superior hardness charac-
teristics of 2H per ASTM D3363-92A and cross hatch adhesion of 4B-5B per ASTM
D3359.93. Impact resistance shall be up to 160 in./lb (ASTM D2794-93). Humidity
and water immersion resistance shall be up to a minimum of 1000 and 250 hours re-
spectively (ASTM D2247-92 and ASTM D870-92). Corrosion durability shall be
confirmed through testing to no less than 1000 hours salt spray per ASTM B117-90.
Coil construction shall be copper-fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes with
copper tube sheets. Galvanized steel tube sheets shall not be acceptable. A polymer
strip shall prevent coil assembly from contacting sheet metal coil pan to maintain
coating integrity and minimize corrosion potential between the coil and pan.
G. Motors:
Motors shall be weatherproof and inherently protected to operate at the specified electrical
characteristics. Motor shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings. When required by en-
vironmental conditions, optional TEAO (Totally Enclosed, Air Over) motors shall be used.
Motors shall be factory wired to weatherproof NEMA 3R control box on opposite header end
of unit. Fan motors shall be a rigid base type mounted to 12 gage galvanized steel rails for
sizes 1 to 12. All other sizes have basket type motor mount. When required by specification
low-sound motors shall be provided
H. Operating Characteristics:
Unit shall be capable of rejecting the required heat at the required cfm and be capable of op-
erating at moderate entering-air temperatures as standard and at reduced entering-air tempera-
tures with optional fan cycling or fan motor speed control.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313 - 4
G. Electrical Characteristics:
All electrical power wiring shall enter the unit cabinet at a single location. Control circuit is
24 v and control wiring shall enter the unit control box at one connection only.
H. Special Features:
Units shall be furnished with optional factory mounted or field-installed special features (as
required by application).
1. Embossed Aluminum cabinet shall be provided for enhanced appearance and corro-
sion protection.
2. Extended length (30-in., 48-in., 72-in.) mounting legs for unit sizes 12 ton and larger.
3. Low sound condenser-fan motors shall be furnished for lower condenser-fan sound
applications.
4. Fan contactor shall be factory wired to the condenser fan with 24 v coil for connec-
tion to indoor compressor unit.
5. Fan cycling (two-fan units only) shall include temperature actuated fan cycling
switch, fan contactors, and low voltage terminal strip. Factory-mounted control cy-
cles one fan in response to entering air-temperature to maintain head pressure.
6. Fan motor speed control shall be provided to allow operation to –20 F. Factory
mounted controller modulates the speed of the lead condenser fan in response to dis-
charge head pressure. Fan cycling control and contactors provided wired with con-
trols. Control shall include all components of fan cycling control and a single-phase
motor qualified for use with speed control and speed controller.
7. Totally Enclosed, Air Over (TEAO) condenser fan motors shall be furnished for pro-
tection in harsh environments.
8. Final pass subcooling circuit shall be provided to allow additional cooling of refrig-
erant to compensate for long refrigerant line or applications with condenser below
compressor.
9. Copper tube with copper fin or precoated or E-coated fins for corrosion protection.
10. Fused disconnect switch for 3-phase units.
11. Control transformer with 24 v output to operate condenser and/or compressor and
evaporator.
12. Defrost thermostat shall be available for field installation on the evaporator coil for
use with the winter start control. The thermostat will open the control switch if frost
begins to form on the evaporator coil. The compressor will stop but the 09AW or
09AZ unit will continue to run.
13. Solenoid valve shall be a field-supplied solenoid valve (located at indoor unit) wired
in parallel with the compressor contactor coil. The valve will shut off the liquid line
to prevent refrigerant migration back to the compressor during the off cycle.
14. Winter start shall be available for use in conjunction with the speed control option.
The winter start control will bypass the low-pressure switch for 3 minutes on com-
pressor start-up to allow system pressures to stabilize.
2.3 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
A. Heat-Rejection Capacity: see schedule on M1.0
B. Ambient-Air Temperature: 95 deg F.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313 - 5
C. Refrigerant Pipe Connections:
1. Number of Connections: per manufacturer
2. Liquid Pipe Size: per manufacturer.
3. Suction Pipe Size: per manufacturer.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install unit level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install air-cooled condenser refrigerant condensers using elastomeric
pads or elastomeric mounts. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified
by acoustic engineer.
C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory
mounted.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Refrigerant Piping: Connect piping to unit with pressure relief, service valve, filter-dryer, and
moisture indicator on each refrigerant-circuit liquid line. Refrigerant piping and specialties are
specified in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection.
2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313 - 6
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
5. Verify proper airflow over coils.
C. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission
to structure.
D. Air-cooled refrigerant condensers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 236313
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SCROLL WATER CHILLERS 236423-1
236423 SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Packaged, air-cooled, electric-motor-driven, scroll water chillers.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. NOT USED.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,
and accessories.
B. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
C. Startup service reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
E. Warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 590 certification program.
B. ARI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590, "Water
Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."
C. ASHRAE Compliance: ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.
D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004,
Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SCROLL WATER CHILLERS 236423-2
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of water chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified period.
1. Compressor Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Aqua Products Company, Inc.
2. McQuay International.
3. Trane.
4. York International Corporation.
C. Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested water chiller complete with base and frame, casing,
compressors, compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator, electrical power, controls, and
accessories.
D. Fabricate base, frame, and attachment to water chiller components strong enough to resist movement
during a seismic event when water chiller base is anchored to field support structure.
E. Cabinet:
1. Base: Galvanized-steel base extending the perimeter of water chiller. Secure frame,
compressors, and evaporator to base to provide a single-piece unit.
2. Frame: Rigid galvanized-steel frame secured to base and designed to support cabinet, control
panel, and other chiller components not directly supported from base.
3. Casing: Galvanized steel.
4. Finish: Coat base, frame, and casing with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of
withstanding a [500] <Insert hours>-hour salt-spray test according to ASTM B 117.
5. Sound-reduction package consisting of the following:
a. Acoustic enclosure around compressors.
b. Reduced-speed fans with acoustic treatment.
c. Designed to reduce sound level without affecting performance.
F. Compressors:
1. Description: Positive-displacement direct drive with hermetically sealed casing.
2. Each compressor provided with suction and discharge service valves, crankcase oil heater, and
suction strainer.
3. Operating Speed: Nominal 3600 rpm for 60-Hz applications.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SCROLL WATER CHILLERS 236423-3
4. Oil Lubrication System: Automatic pump with strainer, sight glass, filling connection, filter
with magnetic plug, and initial oil charge.
5. Vibration Isolation: Mount individual compressors on vibration isolators.
G. Compressor Motors:
1. Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas.
2. High-torque, two-pole induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each
phase.
H. Compressor Motor Controllers:
1. Across the Line: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing.
I. Refrigeration:
1. Refrigerant: R-134a. Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34.
2. Refrigerant Compatibility: Parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with
refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.
3. Refrigerant Circuit: Each circuit shall include a thermal-expansion valve, refrigerant charging
connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor suction and discharge shutoff valves, a liquid-line
shutoff valve, a replaceable-core filter-dryer, a sight glass with moisture indicator, a liquid-
line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line.
4. Refrigerant Isolation: Factory install positive shutoff isolation valves in the compressor
discharge line and the refrigerant liquid-line to allow the isolation and storage of the
refrigerant charge in the chiller condenser.
J. Evaporator:
1. Brazed-plate or shell-and-tube design, as indicated.
2. Shell and Tube:
a. Description: Direct-expansion, shell-and-tube design with fluid flowing through the
shell and refrigerant flowing through the tubes within the shell.
b. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code.
c. Shell Material: Carbon steel.
d. Shell Heads: Removable carbon-steel heads with multipass baffles designed to ensure
positive oil return and located at each end of the tube bundle.
e. Shell Nozzles: Fluid nozzles located along the side of the shell and terminated with
mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to field piping.
f. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design,
expanded into tube sheets.
3. Brazed Plate:
a. Direct-expansion, single-pass, brazed-plate design.
b. Type 316 stainless-steel construction.
c. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code.
d. Fluid Nozzles: Terminate with mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to
field piping.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SCROLL WATER CHILLERS 236423-4
4. Heater: Factory-installed and -wired electric heater with integral controls designed to protect
the evaporator to minus 20 deg F.
5. Remote Mounting: Designed for remote field mounting where indicated. Provide kit for field
installation.
K. Air-Cooled Condenser:
1. Remote condenser, refer to Division 23 Air-cooled refrigerant condensers.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping.
B. Factory test and inspect evaporator according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label.
C. For water chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 370 procedure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION
A. Install water chillers on support structure indicated (indoor installation).
B. Equipment Mounting: Install water chiller using elastomeric pads or elastomeric mounts. Comply
with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch.
C. Equipment Mounting: Install water chiller on vibration isolation inertia bases. Comply with
requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping
and Equipment."
D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged and fill with oil if not factory installed.
F. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.
C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible
connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with
shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SCROLL WATER CHILLERS 236423-5
pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller with a union,
flange, or mechanical coupling.
D. Connect each drain connection with a union and drain pipe and extend pipe, full size of connection,
to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection if required.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.
B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections
for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and
perform the following:
1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested.
2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.
3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.
4. Operate water chiller for run-in period.
5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.
6. Verify proper motor rotation.
7. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller startup
and shutdown.
8. Verify and record performance of chilled-water flow and low-temperature interlocks.
9. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices.
10. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 236423
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 1
SECTION 238219 - FAN COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems
and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-
2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In the Fan-Coil-Unit Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce
lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 2
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each fan-coil unit is based on the product
named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2.2 FAN-COIL UNITS
A. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and
UL 1995.
B. Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch thick, foil-covered, closed-cell foam complying with
ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum
flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
C. Main and Auxiliary Drain Pans: Plastic, Stainless steel or Insulated galvanized steel with
plastic liner. Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004. Drain
pans shall be removable.
D. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture. Floor-mounting units shall have leveling
screws.
E. Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color.
1. Vertical Unit Front Panels: Removable, steel, with steel discharge grille and channel-
formed edges, cam fasteners, and insulation on back of panel.
2. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and hinge and
attached with safety chain; with integral stamped discharge grilles.
3. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall.
F. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting
value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1. Washable Foam: 70 percent arrestance and 3 MERV.
2. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV.
3. Pleated Cotton-Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV.
G. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water
temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain valve.
H. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and
hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box for
overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Terminate elements
in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 3
I. Fan and Motor Board: Removable.
1. Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor.
Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel
fan scrolls.
2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board.
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
3. Wiring Termination: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
J. Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L or ASTM B 88, Type M copper tube
with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet, and
outlet.
1. Three-way, modulating control valve for chilled-water coil.
2. Two-way, on/off control valve for heating coil.
3. Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or
TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
4. Calibrated-Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type; 125-psig working pressure,
250-deg F maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or venturi,
connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, threaded ends,
and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.
5. Automatic Flow-Control Valve: Brass or ferrous-metal body; 300-psig working pressure
at 250 deg F, with removable, corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning piston
spring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow with plus or minus 10 percent over
differential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig.
6. Y-Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125-psig
working pressure; with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel
basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 hose-end, full-port,
ball-type blowdown valve in drain connection.
7. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
K. Control devices and operational sequences are specified in Division 23 Sections
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."
L. Basic Unit Controls:
1. Control voltage transformer.
2. Wall-mounted thermostat with the following features:
a. Heat-cool-off switch.
b. Fan on-auto switch.
c. Fan-speed switch.
d. Automatic changeover.
e. Adjustable deadband.
f. Exposed set point.
g. Exposed indication.
h. Degree F indication.
M. Terminal Controller:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 4
1. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven-day clock with a
minimum of four programmable periods per day.
2. Unoccupied Period Override Operation: Two hours.
3. Unit Supply-Air Fan Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Fan runs continuously.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Fan cycles to maintain room setback temperature.
4. Hydronic-Cooling-Coil Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Modulate control valve to maintain room temperature.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Close control valve.
5. Heating-Coil Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Modulate control valve to provide heating if room temperature
falls below thermostat set point.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Start fan and modulate control valve if room temperature
falls below setback temperature.
6. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.
N. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.
2.3 DUCTED FAN-COIL UNITS
A. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and
UL 1995.
B. Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch thick foil-faced glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and
attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum
flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
C. Drain Pans: Plastic, stainless steel, or insulated galvanized steel with plastic liner. Fabricate
pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
D. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture, with baked-enamel finish and removable
access panels.
E. Cabinets: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color.
1. Supply-Air Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished and insulated to match the chassis.
2. Return-Air Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished to match the chassis.
3. Mixing Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished and insulated to match the chassis with
outdoor- and return-air, formed-steel dampers.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 5
4. Dampers: Galvanized steel with extruded-vinyl blade seals, flexible-metal jamb seals,
and interlocking linkage.
F. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting
value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1. Washable Foam: 70 percent arrestance and 3 MERV.
2. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV.
3. Pleated Cotton-Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV.
G. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water
temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain.
H. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and
hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box for
overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection of heaters. Terminate
elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless- stainless-steel
hardware.
I. Direct-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated,
multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and
painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.
J. Belt-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated,
single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the cabinet.
Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.
1. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
K. Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L or ASTM B 88, Type M copper tube
with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet, and
outlet.
1. Three-way, modulating control valve for chilled-water coil.
2. Two-way, on/off control valve for heating coil.
3. Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or
TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
4. Calibrated-Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type; 125-psig working pressure,
250 deg F maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or venturi,
connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, threaded ends,
and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.
5. Automatic Flow-Control Valve: Brass or ferrous-metal body; 300-psig working pressure
at 250 deg F; with removable, corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning piston
spring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow with plus or minus 10 percent over
differential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig.
6. Y-Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125-psig
working pressure, with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel
basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 hose-end, full-port,
ball-type blowdown valve in drain connection.
7. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 6
L. Control devices and operational sequence are specified in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation
and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."
M. Basic Unit Controls: see section 2.2
N. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
B. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators are
specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
C. Verify locations of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room
details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above finished floor.
D. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
E. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as
follows:
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
2. Connect piping to fan-coil-unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package
if shipped loose.
3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.
a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install
cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.
F. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for
duct connections.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 7
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 238219
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316 - 1
SECTION 238316 - RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes radiant heating piping, including pipes, fittings, and piping specialties.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of radiant heating pipe, fitting, manifold, specialty, and control.
B. Shop Drawings: Show piping layout and details drawn to scale, including valves, manifolds,
controls, and support assemblies, and their attachments to building structure.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Uponor Wirsbo Co HeatLink USA Inc.
2. REHAU.
3. Vanguard Piping Systems, Inc.
4. Warmboard, Inc.
5. Watts Radiant, Inc.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
C. Pipe Material: PEX plastic according to ASTM F 876.
D. Oxygen Barrier: Limit oxygen diffusion through the tube to maximum 0.10 mg per cu. m/day
at 104 deg F according to DIN 4726.
E. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, metal insert and copper crimp rings.
F. Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 100 psig and 180 deg F.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316 - 2
2.2 PEX/AL/PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Uponor Wirsbo Co.
2. Stadler-Viega.
3. Rehau.
C. Pipe Material: PEX plastic bonded to the inside and outside of a welded aluminum tube
according to ASTM F 1281.
D. Oxygen Barrier: Limit oxygen diffusion through the pipe to maximum 0.10 mg per cu. m/day
at 104 deg F according to DIN 4726.
E. Fittings: ASTM F 1974, metal insert fittings with split ring and compression nut (compression
joint) or metal insert fittings with copper crimp rings (crimp joint).
F. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 50 or less, respectively, tested according
to ASTM E 84.
G. Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 100 psig and 210 deg F.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLDS
A. Manifold: Minimum NPS 1, brass or copper.
B. Main Shutoff Valves:
1. Factory installed on supply and return connections.
2. Two or three-piece body.
3. Body: Brass or bronze.
4. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
5. Seals: PTFE.
6. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
C. Manual Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Key furnished with valve, or screwdriver bit.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
6. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316 - 3
D. Balancing Valves:
1. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type.
2. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel.
3. Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer.
4. Seat: PTFE.
5. Visual Flow Indicator: Flowmeter with visible indication in a clear plastic cap at top of
valve.
6. Differential Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable meter to measure loss
across calibrated orifice.
7. Handle Style: Lever or knob, with memory stop to retain set position if used for shutoff.
8. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
E. Zone Control Valves:
1. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type.
2. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel.
3. Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer.
4. Seat: PTFE.
5. Actuator: Replaceable electric motor.
6. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
F. Thermometers:
1. Mount on supply and return connections.
2. Case: Dry type, metal or plastic, 2-inch diameter.
3. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.
4. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Black metal.
7. Window: Plastic.
8. Connector: Rigid, back type.
9. Thermal System: Liquid- or mercury-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or
brass stem.
10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range.
G. Mounting Brackets: Copper, or plastic or copper-clad steel, where in contact with manifold.
2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Cable Ties:
1. Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.
2. Minimum Width: 1/8 inch.
3. Tensile Strength: 20 lb, minimum.
4. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316 - 4
B. Floor-Mounting Staples:
1. Steel, with corrosion-resistant coating and smooth finish without sharp edges.
2. Minimum Thickness: 3/32 inch.
3. Width: Minimum, wider than tubing.
C. Floor-Mounting Clamps:
1. Two bolt, steel, with corrosion-resistant coating and smooth finish without sharp edges.
2. Minimum Thickness: 3/32 inch.
3. Width: Minimum, wider than tubing.
D. Floor-Mounting Tracks:
1. Aluminum or plastic channel track with smooth finish, no sharp edges.
2. Minimum Thickness: 1/16 inch.
3. Slot Width: Snap fit to hold tubing.
4. Slot Spacing: 2-inch or 3-inch intervals.
E. Channeled Subfloor:
1. Plywood, APA-rated subfloor panel, composed of premium, tongue-and-groove, 7-layer,
Douglas fir structural subfloor panels.
2. Particleboard manufactured to meet Federal Housing Authority standards of less than 0.3-
ppm formaldehyde.
3. Clad panel with minimum 0.025-inch- thick aluminum recessed in the grooves sized to
maintain contact with radiant piping.
F. Modular Interlocking Blocks:
1. Polypropylene snap-together blocks with grooves to support piping.
2. Galvanized sheet metal or aluminum emission plates.
3. Natural mineralboard cover panel.
2.5 CONTROLS
A. Temperature-control devices and sequence of operations are specified in Division 23 Sections
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Danfoss Inc.
2. HeatLink USA Inc.
3. Honeywell.
4. Infloor Radiant Heating Inc.
5. IPEX Inc.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316 - 5
6. REHAU.
7. Slant/Fin Corp.
8. Stadler-Viega.
9. tekmar Control Systems, Ltd.
10. Uponor Wirsbo Co.
11. Vanguard Piping Systems, Inc.
12. Watts Radiant, Inc.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
13. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
D. Wall-Mounting Thermostat:
1. Minimum temperature range from 50 to 90 deg F.
2. Manually operated with on-off switch.
3. Day and night setback and clock program with minimum four periods per day.
4. Operate pumps or open zone control valves if room temperature falls below the
thermostat setting, and stop pumps or close zone control valves when room temperature
rises above the thermostat setting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Install the following types of radiant heating piping for the applications described:
1. Piping in Interior Reinforced-Concrete Floors: PEX.
2. Piping in Level Fill Concrete Floors (Not Reinforced): PEX.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping
as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop or Coordination Drawings.
B. Install radiant heating piping continuous from the manifold through the heated panel and back
to the manifold without piping joints in heated panels.
C. Connect radiant piping to manifold in a reverse-return arrangement.
D. Do not bend pipes in radii smaller than manufacturer's minimum bend radius dimensions.
E. Install manifolds in accessible locations, or install access panels to provide maintenance access
as required in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
F. Refer to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for pipes and connections to hydronic systems
and for glycol-solution fill requirements.
G. Piping in Interior Reinforced-Concrete Floors:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316 - 6
1. Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to reinforcement using cable ties.
2. Space cable ties a maximum of every 36 inches, 9 inches o.c., and at center of turns or
bends.
3. Maintain 2-inch minimum cover.
4. Install a sleeve of 3/8-inch thick, foam-type insulation or PE pipe around tubing and
extending for a minimum of 10 inches on each side of slab joints to protect the tubing
passing through expansion or control joints. Anchor sleeve to slab form at control joints
to provide maximum clearance for saw cut.
5. Maintain minimum 40-psig pressure in piping during concrete placement and continue
for 24 hours after placement.
H. Piping in Level Fill Concrete Floors (Not Reinforced):
1. Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to subfloor using tracks, clamps, or
staples.
2. Space tracks, clamps, or staples a maximum of every 36 inches, 9 inches o.c., and at
center of turns or bends.
3. Maintain 3/4-inch minimum cover.
4. Install a sleeve of 3/8-inch thick, foam-type insulation or PE pipe around tubing and
extending for a minimum of 10 inches on each side of slab joints to protect the tubing
passing through expansion or control joints. Anchor sleeve to slab form at control joints
to provide maximum clearance for saw cut.
5. Maintain minimum 40-psig pressure in piping during the concrete pour and continue for
24 hours during curing.
I. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and
ensure integrity of piping and as approved by Architect.
J. After system balancing has been completed, mark balancing valves to permanently indicate
final position.
K. Perform the following adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position.
2. Check operation of zone control valves.
3. Set temperature controls so all zones call for full flow.
4. Purge air from piping.
L. After the concrete or plaster heating panel has cured as recommended by concrete supplier,
operate radiant heating system as follows:
1. Start system heating at a maximum of 10 deg F above the ambient radiant panel
temperature, and increase 10 deg F each following day until design temperature is
achieved.
2. For freeze protection, operate at a maximum of 60 deg F supply-water temperature.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare radiant heating piping for testing as follows:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 238316 - 7
1. Open all isolation valves and close bypass valves.
2. Open and verify operation of zone control valves.
3. Flush with clean water, and clean strainers.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Subject piping to
hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure but not more
than 100 psig or per manufacturer’s recommendation. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning radiant heating piping components that do not pass tests,
and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare a written report of testing.
END OF SECTION 238316
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SNOW MELT PIPING 238316-1
SECTION 238316 SNOW MELT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes snow melt piping, including pipes, manifolds, fittings, and piping specialties.
B. See Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for pipes and connections to hydronic systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Snow melt piping specialties, including rated capacities and water flow and pressure
drops of selected models.
B. Shop Drawings: Show piping layout and details drawn to scale, including valves, manifolds,
controls, and support assemblies and their attachments to the building structure.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of snow melt piping with the slabs.
B. Coordinate size and location of landscape boxes to allow access to manifolds concealed in the
landscaping.
C. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure
integrity of piping and as approved by Architect.
D. Coordinate the rigid board insulation and expansion joint requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Distribution Manifolds:
a. Wirsbo Co.
b. Rehau Inc.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SNOW MELT PIPING 238316-2
2. Controls:
a. Tekmar Control Systems, Ltd.
b. Infloor Heating Systems.
c. Wirsbo Co.
3. Snowmelt Sensors:
a. Tekmar Control Systems Ltd..
b. Rehau Inc.
c. Wirsbo Co.
2.2 HEAT-TRANSFER PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. PE Plastic: ASTM D 2239, SIDR-11.5 for service at 30 psig and 140 deg F.
1. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, copper with stainless-steel clamps.
B. PEX Plastic: ASTM F 876.
1. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, copper or brass compression type.
C. Single-Tube Plastic tubing: Braided-fiber-reinforced, EPDM elastomeric with extra carbon steel
with high-temperature, oxygen-barrier cover; for service at 100 psigand 210 deg F.
1. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, copper with stainless-steel crimps or clamps.
2.3 SNOWMELT SPECIALTIES
A. Distribution Manifolds: Brass modular design with injection pumping, main shutoff and balancing
valves with thermometers, zone shutoff and balancing valves with flow meter, and identification
plate.
1. Mixing Valves: 125 psig, 230 deg F maximum operating pressure and temperature, brass or
cast-bronze body, EPDM seals, and threaded connections.
2. Identification Plate: Valve plate shall identify room served and loop number.
3. If more than one loop serves a room, provide identification plates on manifolds to identify
rooms served.
2.4 CONTROLS
A. Thermostats: 32 to 160 deg F, standard 24 V, 3 wire.
B. Snow Detector: 24-V, microprocessor-based, pulse-width-modulation type, automatically detects
snow and maintains set temperature in a snow-melting slab.
C. Snow-Melting Control Sequence: Flow-through snow-melting piping is modulated to satisfy snow
detector.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AESI 27210 SNOW MELT PIPING 238316-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HEAT-TRANSFER PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping downstream from manifolds without joints.
B. Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to concrete reinforcement using plastic tie straps.
1. Install a sleeve of foam-type insulation around tubing and extending for a minimum of 3
echelons each side of the slab penetration to protect the tubing passing through expansion
joints.
C. Install manifolds in accessible locations.
D. Fill snow melt system with 50% of propylene glycol-to-water solution.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Preparation:
1. Temporarily restrain expansion joints so they are not damaged due to test pressure. If
temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
2. Flush with clean water, and clean strainers.
3. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure.
B. Tests:
1. Subject piping to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure
but not more than 100 psig.
2. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied, examine piping, joints, and connections for
leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat
hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
C. Prepare a written report of testing.
END OF SECTION 238316
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, XHHW,
UF, USE, and SO.
C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for [armored cable, Type AC] [metal- clad
cable, Type MC] [mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI] [nonmetallic- sheathed
cable, Type NM] [Type SO] [and] [Type USE] with ground wire.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
6. Or approved alternate
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: [Copper] [Copper for feeders smaller than No. 1/0 AWG; copper or aluminum for
feeders No. 1/0 AWG and larger]. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG
and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: [Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway] [Type XHHW, single
conductors in raceway]
B. Exposed Feeders: [Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway] [Armored cable, Type
AC] [Metal-clad cable, Type MC]
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: [Type THHN-THWN,
single conductors in raceway] [Armored cable, Type AC] [Metal-clad cable, Type MC]
[Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI] [Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type
NM].
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: [Type THHN-
THWN, single conductors in raceway] [Underground feeder cable, Type UF].
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: [Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway] [Armored cable, Type AC] [Metal-clad cable, Type MC] [Mineral-insulated, metal-
sheathed cable, Type MI] [Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM].
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: [Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway] [Armored cable, Type AC] [Metal-clad cable, Type MC] [Mineral-
insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI] [Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM].
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
[Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway] [Underground branch-circuit cable, Type
UF].
H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-
steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
I. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
J. Class 2 Control Circuits: [Type THHN-THWN, in raceway] [Power-limited cable,
concealed in building finishes] [Power-limited tray cable, in cable tray].
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm)
of slack.
3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways
and Cabling."
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 260519
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES260523 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. UTP cabling.
2. RS-232 cabling.
3. RS-485 cabling.
4. Low-voltage control cabling.
5. Control-circuit conductors.
6. Identification products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.
B. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the
studs of a wall cavity).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of an NRTL.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: [25] or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: [50] or less.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
B. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES260523 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PATHWAYS
A. Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of [Category 5e] [Category 6] cabling,
designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage
cable.
1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.
2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.
3. Straps and other devices.
B. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for
Electrical Systems."[ Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.]
1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and
2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep.
2.2 BACKBOARDS
A. Description: Plywood, [fire-retardant treated, ]3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by
2440 mm). Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Division 06 Section
"Rough Carpentry."
2.3 UTP CABLE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.
2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.
3. CommScope, Inc.
4. Draka USA.
5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.
6. KRONE Incorporated.
7. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT.
8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.
9. Superior Essex Inc.
10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.
11. 3M.
12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.
B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP.
1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.
2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.
3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, [Category 5e] [Category 6].
4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying
with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES260523 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or Type CMG[; or Type MPP,
Type CMP, Type MPR, Type CMR, Type MP, or Type MPG].
b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP[ or Type MPP], complying with
NFPA 262.
c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR[; or Type MPP, Type CMP, or
Type MPR], complying with UL 1666.
d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX[; or Type MPP, Type CMP,
Type MPR, Type CMR, Type MP, Type MPG, Type CM, or Type CMG].
e. Multipurpose: Type MP or Type MPG[; or Type MPP or Type MPR].
f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262.
g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR [or Type MPP], complying with UL 1666.
2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.
2. Dynacom Corporation.
3. Hubbell Premise Wiring.
4. KRONE Incorporated.
5. Leviton Voice & Data Division.
6. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.
7. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.
8. Panduit Corp.
9. Siemon Co. (The).
10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.
11. Or Approved Alternate
B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or
tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.
C. Connecting Blocks: [110 style for Category 5e] [110 style for Category 6] [66 style for
Category 5e]. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus [25]
percent spare; integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES260523 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2.5 RS-232 CABLE
RS-232 communications require three conductors with an overall shield. Circuit is limited to a distance
of not more than 50 feet (15 m).
A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.
1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. Polypropylene insulation.
3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned-copper drain
wire.
6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. Plastic insulation.
3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage.
4. Plastic jacket.
5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned-copper drain
wire.
6. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
2.6 RS-485 CABLE
RS-485 communications require two twisted pairs. Circuit is limited to a distance of not more than
4000 feet (1220 m).
A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM[or Type CMG].
1. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES260523 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2.7 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
C. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
D. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. Plastic jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.
2.8 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, [Type THHN-THWN] [Type XHHN], in raceway,
complying with [UL 83] [UL 44].
B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, [Type THHN-THWN, in raceway] [Type XHHN, in
raceway] [power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes] [power-limited tray cable, in
cable tray], complying with [UL 83] [UL 44].
C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF,
complying with UL 83.
2.9 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES260523 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Brady Corporation.
2. HellermannTyton.
3. Kroy LLC.
4. Panduit Corp.
5. Or Approved Alternate
B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends
between pull points.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
for installation of conduits and wireways.
C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.
D. Pathway Installation in Equipment Rooms:
1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is
installed or in the corner of room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around
perimeter walls of room.
2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.
3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering room from overhead.
4. Extend conduits [3 inches (75 mm)] above finished floor.
5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to
grounding system.
E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch (2440-mm) dimension vertical. Butt adjacent
sheets tightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.
4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding
30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings,
outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES260523 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable.
7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat
lamps shall not be used for heating.
8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull
tensions.
C. UTP Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to
maintain cable geometry.
D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:
1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section
"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
E. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces
with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm)
above ceilings by cable supports not more than [60 inches (1525 mm)] apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other
potentially damaging items.
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES260523 - 8
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
F. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating
unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources,
including electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways
and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches
(127 mm).
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches
(305 mm).
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches
(600 mm).
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches
(64 mm).
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches
(150 mm).
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches
(305 mm).
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power
lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall
be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches
(75 mm).
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches
(150 mm).
5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and
Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).
6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).
3.3 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A.
Remove abandoned conductors and cables.
3.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A.
Minimum Conductor Sizes:
1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, [No 14] <Insert wire size> AWG.
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES260523 - 9
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits, [No. 16] <Insert wire size>
AWG.
3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits, [No 12] <Insert wire
size> AWG.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.6 GROUNDING
Retain one or both paragraphs below.
A. For data communications wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM,
"Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with
requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Retain one of first two paragraphs below to identify who shall perform tests and inspections. If retaining
second option in first paragraph, or if retaining second paragraph, retain "Field quality-control reports"
Paragraph in "Submittals" Article.
A. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
Retain first paragraph below to require Contractor to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
Retain first paragraph below to describe tests and inspections to be performed.
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES260523 - 10
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings.
Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect
cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment
and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
Retain first subparagraph below if verification of quality is to be performed before completion of the
cabling. Delete if not retaining cable connecting hardware in "UTP Cable Hardware" Article.
3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity
between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables
after termination but not after cross connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in
TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance
requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with
measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)"
Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment
manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is
formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument
to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.
See Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and
Division 01 Section "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.
E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 260523
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Revise this Section by deleting and inserting text to meet Project-specific requirements.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless
otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8
inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at
least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad or Zinc-coated Stainless steel 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 3/0 AWG minimum.
Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two
bands of yellow.
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as
otherwise indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits.
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment
grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and
power-distribution units.
10. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits
supplying x-ray equipment.
B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-
mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters,
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to
air duct and connected metallic piping.
C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
D. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by
NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-
STD-607-A.
1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide
No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding
electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central
equipment location.
2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch (6.3-by-100-by-300-mm) grounding bus.
3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless
otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where
they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if
any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length
from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding
electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are
specified in Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems,"
and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.
1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated.
Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush
with finished grade or floor.
D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange using one of
the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond
across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
3.4 LABELING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for
instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.
B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the
grounding electrode conductor where exposed.
1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason,
notify the facility manager."
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-
resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at
ground test
wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10
ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5
ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3
ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the
applied force.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.
3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA-4.
4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-
4.
6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel or Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and
associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping
pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable
iron.
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated stainless steel, for use
in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel
shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or
other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future
without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps, single-
bolt conduit clamps, or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention
in support channel.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-
1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems
above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, [EMT] [IMC]
[RMC] [EMT, IMC, and RMC] may be supported by openings through structure members, as
permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)
thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs
less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock
washers and nuts, Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with
MSS SP-69, or Spring-tension clamps.
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-
fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.4 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm).
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 [painting Sections] [Section "High-
Performance Coatings"] for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. See Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior
ductbanks and manholes, and underground handholes, boxes, and utility construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.
2. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set- screw or compression type.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. ENT: NEMA TC 13.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2 or Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. LFNC: UL 1660.
D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman.
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
C. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, 12, 3R, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type, Screw-cover type, Flanged-and-gasketed type or As
indicated.
F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hoffman.
2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
C. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on
cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.
D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard
enamel finish in color selected by Architect Prime coating, ready for field painting.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with
texture and color selected by Architect.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division.
b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division.
c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division. d.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
e. Panduit Corp.
f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, semi-adjustable, rectangular.
E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum or galvanized,
cast iron with gasketed cover.
Coordinate first paragraph and subparagraphs below with Drawings if hinged cover enclosures other than
NEMA 250, Type 1 are required, e.g., very dusty areas, and if consideration should be given to use of
NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosures.
H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
I. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, RNC, Type
EPC-80-PVC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, EMT, RNC,
Type EPC-40-PVC.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC, direct buried.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC or LFNC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3Ror 4.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT, ENT, or RNC.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT or RNC identified for such
use.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit or IMC.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT, ENT or RNC, Type
EPC-40-PVC.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit or IMC.
7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT.
8. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless
steel or nonmetallic in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size. D.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-
water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising
above the floor.
I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end
of pull wire.
K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows:
1. 3/4-Inch (19-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50
feet (15 m).
2. 1-Inch (25-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet
(23 m).
3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway
unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes
or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these
requirements.
L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
M. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C), and that
has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m).
1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and
quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)
temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C)
temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125
deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.
2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C)
of temperature change.
3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the
time of installation.
N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for
recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall.
P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
Q. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches
(150 mm) in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction
as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches
(300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout the length of the elbow.
5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through the floor.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and
encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel
conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment
pad or
foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct-
buried conduits, placing them 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Align planks along the width and
along the centerline of conduit.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements
are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
END OF SECTION 260533
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260536 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steel and aluminum cable trays and accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray
indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans,
elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements.
Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate
connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.
1. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer,
licensed in the state where Project is located, who is responsible for their preparation.
a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
b. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to
supported cable trays.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Chalfant Manufacturing Company.
2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
3. Cope, T. J., Inc.; a subsidiary of Allied Tube & Conduit.
4. GS Metals Corp.; GLOBETRAY Products.
5. MONO-SYSTEMS, Inc.
6. MPHusky.
7. PW Industries.
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260536 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2.2 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel, complying with NEMA VE 1.
1. Factory-standard primer, ready for field painting; with cadmium-plated hardware
according to ASTM B 766.
2. Mill galvanized before fabrication, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275)
coating; with hardware galvanized according to ASTM B 633 or cadmium plated
according to ASTM B 766.
3. Electrogalvanized before fabrication, complying with ASTM B 633; with hardware
galvanized according to ASTM B 633.
4. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Class B2;
with chromium-zinc, ASTM F 1136 or Type 316 stainless-steel hardware.
5. Epoxy-resin paint over paint manufacturer's recommended primer and corrosion-
inhibiting treatment; with cadmium-plated hardware according to ASTM B 766 or
Type 316 stainless-steel hardware.
B. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Aluminum, complying with NEMA VE 1, Aluminum
Association's Alloy 6063-T6 for rails, rungs, and cable trays, and Alloy 5052-H32 or
Alloy 6061-T6 for fabricated parts; with chromium-zinc, ASTM F 1136 or Type 316
stainless-steel splice-plate fasteners, bolts, and screws.
C. Sizes and Configurations: Refer to the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific
requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations.
1. Center-hanger supports may be used only when specifically indicated.
2.3 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and
finishes as cable tray.
B. Covers: Solid, type of same materials and finishes as cable tray.
C. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.
D. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
2.4 WARNING SIGNS
A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) high, black letters on yellow background with legend
"WARNING! NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT FOR LADDERS OR
PERSONNEL."
B. Materials and fastening are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with recommendations in NEMA VE 2. Install as a complete system, including all
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260536 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate support systems, barrier strips, hinged
horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses.
B. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.
C. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure.
1. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements.
2. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules.
3. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other
appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or
wall-bracket form
as required by application.
4. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
5. Manufacture center-hung support, designed for 60 percent versus 40 percent eccentric
loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.
6. Locate and install supports according to NEMA FG 1 or NEMA VE 1.
D. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray and to equipment.
Support cable tray independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable tray on equipment
enclosure.
E. Install expansion connectors where cable tray crosses building expansion joint and in cable tray
runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA FG 1 or NEMA VE 1. Space
connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.
F. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.
G. Make cable tray connections using standard fittings.
H. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
I. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed
cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.
J. Workspace: Install cable trays with enough space to permit access for installing cables.
K. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data
processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.
L. After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on or
near cable trays.
M. Install cables only when cable tray installation has been completed and inspected.
N. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties as recommended
by NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the
cable jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.
O. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 18 inches (457 mm). Install intermediate supports
when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.
P. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable tray.
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260536 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
Q. Install covers after installation of cable is completed.
R. Ground cable trays according to manufacturer's written instructions.
S. Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor with cable tray, in addition to those required
by NFPA 70.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for
compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey:
1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in
cable tray, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause
or have caused damage.
2. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable tray do not exceed that
permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communication or data-processing circuits are
separated from power circuits by barriers.
3. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that
could damage cables.
4. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of tray ventilation.
5. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical
continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque
in suspect areas.
6. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with
specified hardware.
7. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that
all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray.
B. Report results in writing.
END OF SECTION 260536
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Sleeve-seal fittings.
4. Grout.
5. Silicone sealants.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in
fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without
penetrating items.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves:
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,
plain ends.
2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel
sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal
joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
2. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and
with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3
mm).
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one
or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5
mm).
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
sleeve and raceway or cable.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. CALPICO, Inc.
c. Metraflex Company (The).
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e. Proco Products, Inc.
3. Sealing Elements: EPDM or Nitrile (Buna N) rubber interlocking links shaped to fit
surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel, Plastic, or Stainless steel.
5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, or
Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in
concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
a. Presealed Systems.
b. Or Approved Alternate
2.4 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-
rated walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below.
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces that are not fire rated.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. Sealant shall have VOC content of g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit
Floors and Walls:
1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint
sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements
in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly
between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;
protect material while curing.
2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
3. Size pipe sleeves to provide [1/4-inch (6.4-mm)] <Insert dimension> annular clear
space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed[ or
unless seismic criteria require different clearance].
4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are
used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush
with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50
mm) above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular
sleeved opening.
2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
assemblies.
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel or cast-iron pipe
sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves
to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for
installing sleeve-seal system.
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at
raceway entries into building.
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or
cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical
sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION 260544
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for raceways.
2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground-line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted,
flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching
wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned,
flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or
cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,
pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet
and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm)
wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet
and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve,
2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
to stay in place by gripping action.
2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils
(0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet
and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white
stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and
locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when
exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
C. Tag: Type I :
1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the
inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2. Thickness: 4 mils (0.1 mm).
3. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft. (9.0 kg/100 sq. m).
4. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf (133.4 N), and 2500 psi
(17.2 MPa).
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
D. Tag: Type ID:
1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid
aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of
the conductive core, bright-colored, [continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of
the utility, ]compounded for direct-burial service.
2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm).
3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm).
4. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m).
5. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N), and 4600 psi
(31.7 MPa).
2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with
0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required
for application.
2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).
E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915
MM)."
2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs
up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall
provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall
provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
C. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be
1 inch (25 mm).
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and
application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location
(exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel
machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical
fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.
E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band
shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,
at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in
congested areas.
F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below
finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or
concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
preparation and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum
intervals.
B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and
pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend
and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1. Emergency Power.
2. Power.
3. UPS.
C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for
ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if
authorities having jurisdiction permit.
b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where
splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent
possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
D. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.
E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags or marker tape to conductors
and list source.
F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,
and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in
raceway.
H. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403
unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment
in finished spaces.
I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-
adhesive warning labels, Baked-enamel warning signs, or Metal-backed, butyrate warning
signs.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
K. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at
equipment used for power transfer, or load shedding.
L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include
power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label, Adhesive film label with clear
protective overlay, Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, or
laminated acrylic label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text
with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-
1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2
inches (50 mm) high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label or
Stenciled legend 4 inches (100 mm) high.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.
END OF SECTION 260553
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Time switches.
2. Photoelectric switches.
3. Indoor occupancy, switchbox-mounted occupancy and outdoor motion sensors.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy
sensors, and manual light switches.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Field quality-control reports.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TIME SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. Intermatic, Inc.
3. Invensys Controls.
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
5. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
6. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.
C. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying
with UL 917.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Contact Configuration: SPST, DPST or DPDT as required.
3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac or 20-A ballast load, 120-/240- V
ac.
4. Programs: Eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.
5. Programs: Two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for
each day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly
operation on holidays.
6. Programs: <Insert number> channels; each channel is individually programmable with
eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule.
7. Programs: <Insert number> channels; each channel is individually programmable with
two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule with a skip-a-day weekly schedule.
8. Programs: <Insert number> channels; each channel is individually programmable with
two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of
the week.
9. Programs: <Insert number> channels; each channel is individually programmable with
40 on-off operations per week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly
operation on holidays.
10. Programs: <Insert number> channels; each channel is individually programmable with
40 on-off operations per week, plus four seasonal schedules that modify the basic
program, and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.
11. Programs: <Insert configuration>[ and an annual holiday schedule that overrides
the weekly operation on holidays].
12. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a
program[ on selected channels].
13. Astronomic Time: [All] [Selected] channels.
14. Automatic daylight savings time changeover.
15. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.
D. Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches: Comply with UL 917.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Contact Configuration: SPST, DPST, SPDT, DPDT as required.
3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac or 20-A ballast load, 120-/240- V
ac.
4. Circuitry: Allows connection of a photoelectric relay as a substitute for the on-off
function of a program.
5. Astronomic time dial.
6. Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
7. Skip-a-day mode.
8. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures,
minimum of 16 hours.
2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. Intermatic, Inc.
3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.
C. Description: Solid state, with SPST orDPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
connected load, complying with UL 773.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lux), with an adjustment for
turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.
3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.
5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.
2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company.
2. Cooper Industries, Inc.
3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
5. Lightolier Controls.
6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
9. RAB Lighting.
10. Sensor Switch, Inc.
11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
12. Watt Stopper.
C. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy
sensors with a separate power pack.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied,
and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable
over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor is powered from the power pack.
4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2
power source, as defined by NFPA 70.
5. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard
electrical enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal
operation of sensor.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.
8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux); turn
lights off when selected lighting level is present.
D. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of
any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm).
2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq.
ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted
on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling.
E. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes
of reflected ultrasonic energy.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12
inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12
inches/s (305 mm/s).
2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of
600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area
of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of
2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet (27.4 m)
when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet
(4.3 m).
F. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and
ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that
control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of
any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm),
and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm)
in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305
mm/s).
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area
of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company.
2. Cooper Industries, Inc.
3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
5. Lightolier Controls.
6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
9. RAB Lighting.
10. Sensor Switch, Inc.
11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
12. Watt Stopper.
C. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for
mounting in a single gang switchbox.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg C).
3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at
277 V, and 800-W incandescent.
D. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS1:
1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with
a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m).
2. Sensing Technology: PIR or Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic.
3. Switch Type: SP, SP with dual circuit, SP with manual "on" automatic "off", SP with field
selectable automatic "on" or manual "on" automatic "off".
4. Voltage: 120 V; passive-infrared or dual-technology type.
5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150
fc (108 to 1600 lux). The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is
higher than the set point of the sensor.
6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.
7. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.
8. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of
the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.
E. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS2:
1. Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.
(84 sq. m).
2. Sensing Technology: PIR.
3. Switch Type: SP, SP with dual circuit, SP with manual "on" automatic "off", SP with field
selectable automatic "on" or manual "on" automatic "off".
4. Voltage: 120; passive-infrared or dual-technology type.
5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150
fc (108 to 1600 lux). The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is
higher than the set point of the sensor.
6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.
7. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.
8. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of
the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.
2.5 OUTDOOR MOTION SENSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company.
2. Cooper Industries, Inc.
3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
6. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
7. RAB Lighting.
8. Sensor Switch, Inc.
9. Watt Stopper.
C. General Requirements for Sensors: Solid-state outdoor motion sensors.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. PIR or Dual-technology (PIR and infrared) type, weatherproof. Detect occurrences of
6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a
target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm). Comply with UL 773A.
3. Switch Rating:
a. Lighting-Fixture-Mounted Sensor: 1000-W incandescent, 500-VA fluorescent.
b. Separately Mounted Sensor: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and
277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-
V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.
4. Switch Type: SP, SP with dual circuit, SP with manual "on" automatic "off", SP with field
selectable automatic "on" or manual "on" automatic "off" With bypass switch to override
the "on" function in case of sensor failure.
5. Voltage: 120-V type.
6. Detector Coverage:
a. Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900
sq. ft. (84 sq. m).
b. Long Range: 180-degree field of view and 110-foot (34-m) detection range.
7. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc
(108 to 1600 lux). The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is
higher than the set point of the sensor.
8. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.
9. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.
10. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of
the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.
11. Operating Ambient Conditions: Suitable for operation in ambient temperatures ranging
from minus 40 to plus 130 deg F (minus 40 to plus 54 deg C), rated as "raintight"
according to UL 773A.
2.6 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
one of the following:
1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.
2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.
3. Eaton Corporation.
4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution; Total
Lighting Control.
5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
C. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically or electrically held, combination-type
lighting contactors with fusible switch or nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and
UL 508.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served,
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or
less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the
point of installation.
3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.
4. Provide with control and pilot devices as required matching the NEMA type
specified for the enclosure.
2.7 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12
AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not
smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26
Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than
No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low- Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of
areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set
time delay to suit Owner's operations.
C. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-
borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration
isolators.
D. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch (13 mm).
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 8
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide evaluation in field on lighting control devices and perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform the following tests:
1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 260923
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with
capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1. Distribution transformers.
2. Buck-boost transformers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and weights.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers,
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division.
2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp.
3. Controlled Power Company.
4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
5. Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp.
6. General Electric Company.
7. Hammond Co.; Matra Electric, Inc.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
8. Magnetek Power Electronics Group.
9. Micron Industries Corp.
10. Myers Power Products, Inc.
11. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
12. Sola/Hevi-Duty.
13. Square D; Schneider Electric.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
2. Coil Material: Aluminum or Copper.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Cores: One leg per phase.
D. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
E. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
F. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1. Finish Color: Gray.
G. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None.
H. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap
below normal full capacity.
I. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent
taps below normal full capacity.
J. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of
[150] [115] [80] deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
K. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.
2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
L. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561
requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by
designated K-factor.
1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion
corresponding to designated K-factor.
2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
M. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper
electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
N. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
2.4 BUCK-BOOST TRANSFORMERS
A. Description: Self-cooled, two-winding dry type, rated for continuous duty and with wiring
terminals suitable for connection as autotransformer. Transformers shall comply with
NEMA ST 1 and shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561.
B. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
1. Finish Color: Gray.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate. Nameplates are specified in
Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by
transformer manufacturer.
1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's
written instructions and requirements in Division 26
Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan
of transformer connections.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
a. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device
calibration.
b. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other
at 11 months after Substantial Completion.
c. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
scanning observations after remedial action.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower
than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus
or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.
C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
END OF SECTION 262200
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
2. Transient voltage suppression devices.
3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
4. Instrumentation.
5. Control power.
6. Accessory components and features.
7. Identification.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, includingrequired
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed
devices,
equipment features, and ratings.
2. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device included in switchboards.
3. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA PB
2. C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Comply with UL 891.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
C. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:
1. Main Devices: Panel mounted.
2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.
3. Sections front and rear aligned.
D. Nominal System Voltage: 208Y/120 V.
E. Main-Bus Continuous: 600A.
F. Enclosure: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R.
1. Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a
rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
2. Enclosure: Flat roof; bolt-on rear covers for each
section, with provisions for padlocking.
G. Cubical Space Heaters: Factory-installed electric space heaters of sufficient wattage in each
vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point.
H. Space-Heater Control: Thermostats to maintain temperature of each section.
I. Space-Heater Power Source: 120-V external branch circuit.
J. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with
utility company's requirements. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering,
match and align with basic switchboard. Provide service entrance label and
necessary applicable service entrance features.
K. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.
L. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank
compartments.
M. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard:
1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as
switchboard.
2. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily
removable for drilling and cutting.
3. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into
switchboard.
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
4. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support
cables indicated, including those for future installation.
N. Phase and Neutral Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.
Tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy with tin-plated aluminum circuit-
breaker line connections.
1. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- (6-by-50-mm-) minimum size, hard-drawn copper of
98 percent conductivity, equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch-circuit
ground conductors.
2. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of
switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both
ends.
3. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise
indicated, equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables.
O. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and
appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.
2.2 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES
A. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-state,
parallel-connected, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449,
second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit
rating, and with the following features and accessories:
1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
2. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
3. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
4. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,
for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of
any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device.
5. Transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.
B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per mode/160 kA per phase.
C. Withstand Capabilities: 5000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with
less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120-V, three-phase,
four-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.
2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating or
interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-
replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
e. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function.
f. Communication Capability: Universal-mounted communication module with functions
and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
g. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 65
percent of rated voltage.
h. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without
intentional time delay.
i. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker
contacts.
j. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key
shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
B. Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB): 100 percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit
breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.
1. Fixed circuit-breaker mounting.
2. Two-step, stored-energy closing.
3. Standard-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating
plug, trip indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
c. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
4. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-
fault protection function.
5. Remote trip indication and control.
6. Communication Capability: Integral communication module with functions and features
compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section
"Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
7. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be
removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
C. Bolted-Pressure Contact Switch: Operating mechanism uses rotary-mechanical-bolting action
to produce and maintain high clamping pressure on the switch blade after it engages the
stationary contacts.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Boltswitch, Inc.
b. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
c. Pringle Electrical Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Operating Mechanism: Manual handle operation to close switch; stores energy in
mechanism for opening and closing.
a. Electrical Trip: Operation of lever or push-button trip switch, or trip signal from
ground-fault relay or remote-control device, causes switch to open.
b. Mechanical Trip: Operation of mechanical lever, push button, or other device
causes switch to open.
3. Auxiliary Switches: Factory installed, single pole, double throw, with leads connected to
terminal block, and including one set more than quantity required for functional
performance indicated.
4. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
5. Ground-Fault Relay: Comply with UL 1053; self-powered type with mechanical ground-
fault indicator, test function, tripping relay with internal memory, and three-phase current
transformer/sensor.
a. Configuration: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and
time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
6. Open-Fuse Trip Device: Arranged to trip switch open if a phase fuse opens.
D. High-Pressure, Butt-Type Contact Switch: Operating mechanism uses butt-type contacts and a
spring-charged mechanism to produce and maintain high-pressure contact when switch is
closed.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
2. Operating Mechanism: Manual handle operation to close switch; stores energy in
mechanism for opening and closing.
a. Electrical Trip: Operation of lever or push-button trip switch, or trip signal from
ground-fault relay or remote-control device, causes switch to open.
b. Mechanical Trip: Operation of mechanical lever, push button, or other device
causes switch to open.
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3. Auxiliary Switches: Factory installed, single pole, double throw, with leads connected to
terminal block, and including one set more than quantity required for functional
performance indicated.
4. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
5. Ground-Fault Relay: Comply with UL 1053; self-powered type with mechanical ground-
fault indicator, test function, tripping relay with internal memory, and three-phase current
transformer/sensor.
a. Configuration: Integral mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-
delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
6. Open-Fuse Trip Device: Arranged to trip switch open if a phase fuse opens.
E. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
F. Fuses are specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."
2.4 INSTRUMENTATION
A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:
1. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary and secondary shorting
device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay
devices.
2. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units
larger than 3 kVA.
3. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary
wiring to ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, to provide selective tripping of
main and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker, ground-fault
protection.
B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-
wire systems and with the following features:
1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy
tolerances as indicated:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated
values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.
i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from
five to 60 minutes.
2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
2.5 CONTROL POWER
A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
power transformer.
B. Electrically Interlocked Main and Tie Circuit Breakers: Two control-power transformers in
separate compartments, with interlocking relays, connected to the primary side of each control-
power transformer at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. 120-V secondaries
connected through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme.
C. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection
of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.
D. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide
flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for
conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
B. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Suitably identified, wall-mounted, lockable, compartmented steel box or
cabinet. Arrange for wall mounting.
2.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with
one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install switchboards and accessories according to
NECA 400 or NEMA PB 2.1.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal
thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete and Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
D. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.
E. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and
instrumentation.
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 8
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
F. Install spare-fuse cabinet.
G. Comply with NECA 1.
H. Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Division 26 Section
"Enclosed Bus Assemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and
specialties.
I. Comply with requirements for terminating cable trays specified in Division 26 Section "Cable
Trays for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of cable trays, fittings,
and specialties.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying
with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each
meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and
control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
2. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged
and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 262413
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.
F. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
c. Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X.
d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within
hinged trim cover.
4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
C. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom.
D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent
conductivity.
E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression or Mechanical type.
4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor
material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type suitable for use with
conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one
or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary
appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or
remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type
of allowable upstream and branch devices, and listed and labeled for series-connected
short- circuit rating by an NRTL.
I. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
current available at terminals.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
Distribution panelboards, as specified in this article, fall under requirements of "Power Panelboards" in
NFPA 70.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
5. Or Approved Alternate.
C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
D. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
E. Mains: Circuit breaker.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Plug-in or Bolt-on circuit breakers.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125
A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking
device requires mechanical release for removal.
H. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
5. Or Approve Alternate.
C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in or Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable
without disturbing adjacent units.
F. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically or mechanically held, general-
purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.
1. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
G. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
H. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box
equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
C. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating or
interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-
replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault
protection (30-mA trip).
7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699;
120/240-V, single-pole configuration.
8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Compression or Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings,
and conductor materials.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
e. Communication Capability: Universal-mounted communication module with
functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55
percent of rated voltage.
g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle
in on or off position.
h. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on
position.
D. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26
Section "Fuses."
2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to
NECA 407 or NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or
space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits
into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
I. Comply with NECA 1.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room
designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and
control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test to show proper
operation.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 262416
ELECTRICITY METERING 262713 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 262713 - ELECTRICITY METERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes equipment for electricity metering by utility company.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and wiring diagrams.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Application and operating software documentation.
2. Software licenses.
3. Software service agreement.
4. Hard copies of manufacturer's operating specifications, design user's guides for software
and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy Submittal.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.4 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two
years.
B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program
software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised
licenses for use of software.
1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow
Owner to upgrade his computer equipment if necessary.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY
A. Meters will be furnished by utility company.
B. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power utility company.
C. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power utility company.
ELECTRICITY METERING 262713 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
D. Meter Sockets: Steady-state and short-circuit current ratings shall meet indicated circuit ratings.
E. Modular Meter Center: Factory-coordinated assembly of a main service terminal box with
lugs only, wireways, tenant meter socket modules, and tenant feeder circuit breakers
arranged in adjacent vertical sections. Assembly shall be complete with interconnecting buses
and other features as specified below.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
by one of the following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
3. Comply with requirements of utility company for meter center.
4. Housing: NEMA 250,Type 3R enclosure.
5. Minimum Short-Circuit Rating: see one-line diagram.
6. Main Disconnect Device: Circuit breaker, series-combination rated for use with
downstream feeder and branch circuit breakers.
7. Main Disconnect Device: Fusible switch, series-combination rated by circuit-breaker
manufacturer to protect downstream feeder and branch circuit breakers.
8. Tenant Feeder Circuit Breakers: Series-combination-rated molded-case units, rated to
protect circuit breakers in downstream tenant and to house loadcenters and panelboards
that have 10,000-A interrupting capacity.
a. Identification: Complying with requirements in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems" with legend identifying tenant's address. b.
Physical Protection: Tamper resistant, with hasp for padlock.
9. Meter Socket: Rating coordinated with indicated tenant feeder circuit rating.
10. Surge Protection: For main disconnect device, comply with requirements in Division 26
Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.
B. Install meters furnished by utility company. Install raceways and equipment according to utility
company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend
grounding connections as required by utility company.
C. Install modular meter center according to NECA 400 switchboard installation requirements.
D. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
ELECTRICITY METERING 262713 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Series Combination Warning Label: Self-adhesive type, with text as required by
NFPA 70.
2. Equipment Identification Labels: Adhesive film labels with clear protective overlay. For
residential meters, provide an additional card holder suitable for [printed, weather-
resistant card] [typewritten card] with occupant's name.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Connect a load of known kilowatt rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by
metered feeder.
2. Turn off circuits supplied by metered feeder and secure them in off condition.
3. Run test load continuously for eight hours minimum, or longer, to obtain a measurable
meter indication. Use test-load placement and setting that ensures continuous, safe
operation.
4. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual electricity
used, based on test-load rating, duration of test, and sample measurements of
supply
voltage at test-load connection. Record test results.
C. Electricity metering will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 262713
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2. Wall-box motion sensors.
3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
4. Solid-state fan speed controls.
5. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
6. Communications outlets.
B. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates.
C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, feed and non-feed-through type. Comply with
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is
lighted when device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; GF20.
b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.
C. Provide steel junction box for all GFCI receptacles.
2.4 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B.
Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).
b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224
(four way).
c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four
way).
d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),
20AC4 (four way).
C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V. d.
Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON." D.
Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.
c. Leviton; 1221-2L.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.
3. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for
use with mechanically held lighting contactors.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 1995.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557.
c. Leviton; 1257.
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.
F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches,
120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in
lieu of switch handle.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 1995L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557L.
c. Leviton; 1257L.
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.
2.5 WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches,
with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with
UL 1472.
C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off
switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.
1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent
dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
2.6 FAN SPEED CONTROLS
A. Modular, 120-V, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible
frequency and EMI/RFI filters. Comply with UL 1917.
1. Continuously adjustable slider, 5 A.
2. Three-speed adjustable slider, 1.5 A.
2.7 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Wall-Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 6111 for 120 V, 6117 for 277 V.
b. Hubbell; WS1277.
c. Leviton; ODS 10-ID.
d. Pass & Seymour; WS3000.
e. Watt Stopper (The); WS-200.
3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes,
180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m).
B. Wall-Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; AT120 for 120 V, AT277 for 277 V. b.
Leviton; ODS 15-ID.
3. Description: Adaptive-technology type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 20
minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq.
m).
C. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; ATP1600WRP.
b. Leviton; ODWWV-IRW.
c. Pass & Seymour; WA1001.
d. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100.
3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes,
110-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. (111 sq. m).
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
D. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; ATD1600WRP.
b. Leviton; ODW12-MRW.
c. Watt Stopper (The); DT-200.
3. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing,
120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field of view, and a
minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. (111 sq. m).
E. Wide-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; ATP120HBRP.
b. Leviton; ODWHB-IRW.
c. Pass & Seymour; HS1001.
d. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100-3.
3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes,
150-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. (111 sq. m).
F. Exterior Occupancy Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Leviton; PS200-10.
b. Watt Stopper (The); EW-100-120.
3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, weatherproof, adjustable time delay up to
15 minutes, 180-degree field of view, and 110-foot (34-m) detection range. Minimum
switch rating: 1000-W incandescent, 500-VA fluorescent.
2.8 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS
A. Telephone Outlet:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 5530-5E.
b. Leviton; 410803*P
3. Description: Triple RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP;
TIA/EIA-568-B.1 complying with Category 6e. Comply with UL 1863.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 3562.
b. Leviton; 40595.
3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-
B.1; complying with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector.
2.9 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field
painting, or Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel or Smooth, high-impact
thermoplastic.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic or Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift
cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-
resistant , die-cast aluminum or thermoplastic with lockable cover.
2.10 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C. Service Plate: Rectangular or Round, die-cast aluminum or solid brass with satin finish.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Coordinate with Town of Vail.
2.11 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Owner , unless
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
3. TVSS Devices: Blue.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
noted.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by
riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors,
and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show
signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)
in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Dimmers:
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 8
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new,
and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 262726
FUSES 262813 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 262813 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits,
enclosed switches, panelboards, switchboards, enclosed controllers, and motor- control centers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
2. Edison Fuse, Inc.
3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
4. Littelfuse, Inc.
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent
with circuit voltages.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Service Entrance: Class L, fast acting, Class RK1, fast acting, Class J, fast acting, or Class
T, fast acting.
B. Feeders: Class L, fast acting, Class RK1, fast acting, Class RK5, fast acting, or Class J, fast
acting.
C. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 or Class RK5, time delay.
D. Other Branch Circuits: Class J, fast acting.
FUSES 262813 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside
door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.
END OF SECTION 262813
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Receptacle switches.
4. Shunt trip switches.
5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
6. Enclosures.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
C. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate specified
fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in
closed position.
D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS
1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle
with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses,
lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed
position.
F. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS
1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle
with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
G. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
C. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS
1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked
with cover in closed position.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
F. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS
1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked
with cover in closed position.
G. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.3 RECEPTACLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
C. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Fusible Switch: 240-V ac; UL 98 and NEMA KS 1;
horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle
with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.
D. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Nonfusible Switch: 240-V ac; UL 98 and NEMA KS 1;
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with
cover in closed position.
E. Interlocking Linkage: Provided between the receptacle and switch mechanism to prevent
inserting or removing plug while switch is in the on position, inserting any plug other than
specified, and turning switch on if an incorrect plug is inserted or correct plug has not been fully
inserted into the receptacle.
2.4 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
3. Littelfuse, Inc.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. General Requirements: Comply with UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA
interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.
D. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse
block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed
position.
E. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and
secondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip,
connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.
F. Accessories:
1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function.
2. Oiltight ON pilot light.
3. Isolated neutral lug.
4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and
closed.
5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.
6. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; 120-V ac coil voltage.
7. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.
2.5 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
C. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with
interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
D. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for
circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following
field-adjustable settings:
1. Instantaneous trip.
2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
G. Features and Accessories:
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits.
4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type
with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay
settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase,
zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.
5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic
circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of
circuit-breaker contacts.
7. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.
2.6 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to
comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
3. Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D. Install fuses in fusible devices.
E. Comply with NECA 1.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches
and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION 262816
ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency power supply with the
following features:
1. Diesel engine.
2. Unit-mounted cooling system.
3. Remote-mounting control and monitoring.
4. Outdoor enclosure.
B. See Division 26 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays
to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator and accessory indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that engine-generator
set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined
in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the
following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with ASME B15.1.
D. Comply with NFPA 37.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Comply with NFPA 99.
G. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level [1] [2] emergency power supply system.
H. Comply with UL 2200.
I. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.
J. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements
for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by
generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and
other components of installation.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following
environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
performance capability:
1. Ambient Temperature: plus 5 to 40 deg C.
2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.
3. Altitude: Sea level to 8300 feet.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one
of the following:
ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Caterpillar; Engine Div.
2. Generac Power Systems, Inc.
3. Kohler Co.; Generator Division.
4. Magnetek, Inc.
5. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.
2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.
B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete
foundation; and have lifting attachments.
C. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated.
2. Output Connections: Three-phase, three wire.
3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and
address, and model and serial number of component.
D. Generator-Set Performance:
1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no
load to full load.
2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-
load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-
state
operating band within three seconds.
3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no
load to full load.
4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within
the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-
state
operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.
5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load
increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-
state
operating band within five seconds.
6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral
shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence
factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.
7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output
terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not
less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator
system components.
8. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
2.3 ENGINE
A. Fuel: Coordinate fuel requirements with manufacturer.
B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm (11.4 m/s).
ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:
1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller
while passing full flow.
2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil
temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.
3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable
container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or
appliances.
E. Engine Fuel System:
1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under
starting and load conditions.
F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system.
Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.
G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.
H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-
generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.
1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water,
with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.
2. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow
automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by
engine manufacturer.
I. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected
with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure
requirements.
1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.
2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet (3 m) from exhaust discharge after
installation is complete shall be 85 dBA or less.
J. Muffler/Silencer: Residential type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected
with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure
requirements.
1. Minimum sound attenuation of 18 dB at 500 Hz.
2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet (3 m) from exhaust discharge after
installation is complete shall be 95 dBA or less.
K. Muffler/Silencer: Industrial type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected
with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure
requirements.
1. Minimum sound attenuation of 12 dB at 500 Hz.
2. Sound level measured at a distance of 25 feet (8 m) from exhaust discharge after
installation is complete shall be 87 dBA or less.
L. Air-Intake Filter: Standard-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry- filter element
and "blocked filter" indicator.
ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
M. Starting System: 12V or 24V electric, with negative ground.
1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with
ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.
2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine
flywheel without binding.
3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.
4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project
Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twice without recharging.
5. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage
regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.
a. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type.
Unit shall comply with UL 1236.
2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE
A. Comply with NFPA 30.
B. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel oil
tank. Features include the following:
1. Tank level indicator.
2. Capacity: Fuel for 12 hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output.
3. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control
and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more
separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-
selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same
switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or
equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms.
B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator
control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates
generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures
or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms.
C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the
generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.
D. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1
system, and the following:
1. AC voltmeter.
2. AC ammeter.
3. AC frequency meter.
4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
5. Engine-coolant temperature gage.
6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
7. Running-time meter.
ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).
9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.
10. Fuel tank derangement alarm.
11. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.
12. Generator overload.
E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include
wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine
or generator, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems.
Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel.
1. Overcrank shutdown.
2. Coolant low-temperature alarm.
3. Control switch not in auto position.
4. Battery-charger malfunction alarm.
5. Battery low-voltage alarm.
G. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm
conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each
alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual
indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will
reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-
mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.
2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying
with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection.
2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating.
3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other
protective devices.
4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.
B. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground-
fault. Integrate ground-fault alarm indication with other generator-set alarm indications.
2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.
B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated
integrally with generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other
voltages if required.
E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration,
overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated
ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
capacity.
F. Enclosure: Dripproof.
G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.
H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.
1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output-voltage operating band.
I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew
point.
J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding. K.
Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.
2.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES
A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in
single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates of
sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
1. Material: Standard neoprene.
B. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind
loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)
thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment
mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over
corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of
identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.
1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.
2. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 8
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment
instructions and with NFPA 110.
B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or
accessories, for periodic maintenance.
C. Install packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum
deflection of 1 inch (25 mm) on 4- inch- (100-mm-) base tank. Secure sets to anchor bolts
installed in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install
thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel
piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic
Piping."
1. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a
shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with
welded joints. Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are
specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."
E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
F. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
G. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine
generator to allow service and maintenance.
H. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.
I. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.
1. Natural-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas distribution are specified in
Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."
2. LP-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas piping are specified in Division 23 Section
"Facility Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping."
J. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
K. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
L. Identify system components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment" and Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 9
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
to assist in testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual
and mechanical inspection (except those indicated to be optional) for "AC Generators and
for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
2. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for
full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific
gravity under both conditions.
b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a
capacity load test for the battery.
c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.
d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
3. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.
4. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity
of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check
for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
5. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-
inch wg (120 kPa). Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify
that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the
engine.
6. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria.
7. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure
voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases
and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.
8. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent
and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified
limits.
C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
D. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
E. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation.
F. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
G. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
H. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
I. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag
to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 10
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 263213
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes automatic transfer switches rated 600 V and less.
B. See Division 21 Section "Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer
switches for fire pumps.
C. See Division 21 Section "Electric-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer
switches for fire pumps.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,
and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum
clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material
lists for each switch specified.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Comply with NFPA 99.
E. Comply with NFPA 110.
F. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Contactor Transfer Switches:
a. AC Data Systems, Inc.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
b. Caterpillar; Engine Div.
c. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.
d. Generac Power Systems, Inc.
e. GE Zenith Controls.
f. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division.
g. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.
h. Russelectric, Inc.
i. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.
2. Transfer Switches Using Molded-Case Switches or Circuit Breakers:
a. AC Data Systems, Inc.
b. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer.
c. GE Zenith Controls.
d. Hubbell Industrial Controls, Inc.
e. Lake Shore Electric Corporation.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total
system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch
ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective
devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing
according to UL 1008.
1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip
unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.
C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or
better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.
D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-
surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components
shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-
motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.
F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current
between active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case
circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.
2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.
3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional
automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing
contacts.
G. Neutral Switching: provide 3-pole switch, with un-switched neutral.
H. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
I. Oversize Neutral: Ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units indicated for
oversize neutral shall be double the nominal rating of circuit in which switch is installed.
J. Battery Charger: For generator starting batteries.
1. Float type rated 2 A.
2. Ammeter to display charging current.
3. Fused ac inputs and dc outputs.
K. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 3R, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops
during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates
in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.
D. Transfer Switches Based on Molded-Case-Switch Components: Comply with NEMA AB 1,
UL 489, and UL 869A.
E. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two
sources are synchronized in phase.
F. Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay: Controls designate starters so they disconnect motors
before transfer and reconnect them selectively at an adjustable time interval after transfer. Time
delay for reconnecting individual motor loads is adjustable between 1 and 60 seconds, and
settings are as indicated.
G. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral position
arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional,
time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer.
H. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:
1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground
voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of
nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value.
Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer
and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one
second.
3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup
voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at
90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal.
Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.
4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and
factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained
undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.
5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and
emergency-source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source
Available."
b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency
Source Available."
8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts
for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.
9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer
switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of
normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.
10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and
normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.
11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence at remote
engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.
12. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine
generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers
and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset
intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30
minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-
minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:
a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without
load transfer.
b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.
c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not
available.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment.
Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings
for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying
with NEMA ICS 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according
to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems."
B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.
1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend
base no more than 4 inches (100 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions
of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct
concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." D.
Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-
resistance tester. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by
manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of
barriers, covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for
each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of
emergency source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.
c. Verify time-delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control
settings.
e. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding
500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other
poles.
f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer
time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-
down and shutdown.
5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power
delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested
component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and
related equipment as specified below. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
END OF SECTION 263600
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
264313 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 264313 - TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes field-mounted TVSS for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and
control equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights,
electrical characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with IEEE C62.41.2 and test devices according to IEEE C62.45.
C. Comply with NEMA LS 1.
D. Comply with UL 1449.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. ABB USA.
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
264313 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. AC Data Solutions.
3. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT).
4. Atlantic Scientific.
5. Current Technology Inc.; Danaher Power Solutions.
6. Danaher Power Solutions; United Power Products.
7. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
8. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
9. Intermatic, Inc.
10. LEA International.
11. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
12. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power.
13. Northern Technologies, Inc.; a division of Emerson Network Power.
14. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
15. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
16. Surge Suppression Incorporated.
C. Surge Protection Devices:
1. Non-modular.
2. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
3. Comply with UL 1449.
4. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
5. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
6. Integral disconnect switch.
7. Redundant suppression circuits.
8. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
9. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
D. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase.
E. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform described in IEEE
C62.41.2
1. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.
2. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.
3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V, 3-
phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral:400 V for 208Y/120 V.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120 V.
G. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120 V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits shall be as
follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 400 V.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
H. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits with high leg shall
be as follows:
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
264313 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
I. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240 V, 480 V, or 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta circuits
shall be as follows:
1. Line to Line: 1000 V for 240 V.
2. Line to Ground: 1000 V for 240 V.
2.2 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
1. ABB USA.
2. AC Data Solutions.
3. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT).
4. Atlantic Scientific.
5. Current Technology Inc.; Danaher Power Solutions.
6. Danaher Power Solutions; United Power Products.
7. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
8. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
9. Intermatic, Inc.
10. LEA International.
11. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
12. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power.
13. Northern Technologies, Inc.; a division of Emerson Network Power.
14. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
15. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
16. Surge Suppression Incorporated.
C. Surge Protection Devices:
1. Non-modular.
2. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
3. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
4. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
5. Integral disconnect switch.
6. Redundant suppression circuits.
7. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
8. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
D. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per mode/160 kA per phase.
E. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform described in IEEE
C62.41.2:
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
264313 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.
2. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.
3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-
wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral:400 V for 208Y/120 V.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120 V.
G. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits shall be as
follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 400 V.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
H. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits with high leg shall
be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
I. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240 V, 480 V, or 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta circuits
shall be as follows:
1. Line to Line: 1000 V for 240 V.
2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 240 V.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1 or Type 12.
B. Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 3R or Type 4X.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install TVSS devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service
entrance ground.
B. Install TVSS devices for panelboards and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between
suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.
1. Provide 100-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnecting means for TVSS unless
otherwise indicated.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
264313 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. After installing TVSS devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
2. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. TVSS device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment to their sources until
TVSS devices are installed and connected.
B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the TVSS
installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests, and reconnect immediately
after the testing is over.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to maintain TVSS devices.
END OF SECTION 264313
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2. Emergency lighting units.
3. Exit signs.
4. Lighting fixture supports.
5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting,
including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting
relays and contactors.
2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent
lamps.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions,
weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. Product Certificates:
For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5B.
E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
H. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise
indicated.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
I. Air-Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat
extraction and for attaching an air-diffuser-boot assembly specified in Division 23 Section
"Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
1. Air-Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air-diffuser-boot assemblies.
2. Heat-Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity.
3. Combination Heat-Removal and Air-Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp cavity at
both ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air-supply units.
4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return-air volume.
5. Static Fixture: Air-supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches active
units.
2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:
1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.
2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.
3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level
control is indicated.
4. Sound Rating: Class A.
5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.
7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.
8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
9. BF: 0.88 or higher.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
10. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
B. luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.
C. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor,
Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection.
1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
D. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and
bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the
field.
E. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for -5
deg F starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.
F. Ballasts for Residential Applications: Fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low-power-
factor electronic ballasts having a Class B sound rating and total harmonic distortion of
approximately 30 percent.
G. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.
1. Dimming Range: 100 to 10 percent of rated lamp lumens.
2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.
3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system
and lamp type indicated.
4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast,
controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.
H. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.
1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of
the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.
a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.
b. Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens.
2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.
3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system
and lamp type indicated.
I. Ballasts for Tri-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.
1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output
of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.
a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.
b. Low-Level Operation: 30 and 50 percent of rated lamp lumens.
2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.
3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific tri-level control system
and lamp type indicated.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with
ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for
full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:
1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
3. Sound Rating: Class A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.
6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.
9. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT
A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting
fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate [one] <Insert number> fluorescent lamp(s)
continuously at an output of [1100] <Insert value> lumens each. Connect unswitched
circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.
2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.
3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or
entering ceiling space.
a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operability.
b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer
relay.
6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-
required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is
annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.
2.6 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029.
Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single-lamp
ballasts.
3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C).
4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to
minimize audible fixture noise.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C) for single-lamp
ballasts.
2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F (54 deg C).
3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
4. Sound Rating: Class A.
5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than [20] <insert number> percent.
6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.
8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
10. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.
C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter.
Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-
case temperature of 90 deg C.
1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory
installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to
150 W.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F (Minus 40 deg C).
2.7 EXIT SIGNS
A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,
luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp
life.
2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained
power pack.
a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored,
relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and
floated on charger.
d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability.
e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
2.8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with
UL 924.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.
2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops
to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery
when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on
charger.
4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;
bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures.
7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 5 minutes when power is
restored after an outage.
2.9 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2800
initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3000 K, and average rated life
20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.
B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm), 1300 initial
lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3000 K, and average rated life of
20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.
C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3000 K, average
rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming
ballasts unless otherwise indicated.
1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).
2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).
2.10 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel-
and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as fixture.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount
a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
2.11 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four-lamp, surface-mounted or recessed
lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces.
B. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps,
and sockets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each
fixture.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports. C.
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
D. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
E. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.
END OF SECTION 265100
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.
2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.
3. Poles and accessories.
1.2 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION
A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and
supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.
B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf (2224 N), distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.
C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft. (145 Pa), applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting
unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES
A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet
locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. LER Tests Incandescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
2. LER Tests HID Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.
B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light
distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and
support to prevent warping and sagging.
E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or
deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or
replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.
G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to
heat, and UV radiation.
I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light
distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal
and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested
luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support
materials.
M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to
remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind
welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if
present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal
Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of
primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.
N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes
Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff
complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.
3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear
coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,
integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker)
complying with AAMA 611.
a. Color: See Owner.
O. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.
Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from
normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:
a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
b. Lamp tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for
compact fluorescent luminaires.
c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for
HID luminaires.
d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) compact fluorescent luminaires.
e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS A.
Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.
B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory
set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc (16 to 32 lx) and off at 4.5 to 10 fc (48 to 108 lx) with 15-
second minimum time delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent
artificial light sources from causing false turnoff.
1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136.10.
2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.
2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS
A. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:
1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic or
electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg F (minus 17 deg C) starting and operating
temperature with indicated lamp types.
2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type
designed for use with indicated lamp types.
B. Ballast Characteristics:
1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
2. Sound Rating: Class A.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor,
Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection.
5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum.
6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2,
Category A or better.
C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast
provided at temperatures minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C) and higher.
2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of
average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C).
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C).
4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current
ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.
B. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and
capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall
have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90
deg C.
2.6 HID LAMPS
A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), CCT color temperature
1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
1. Dual-Arc Tube Lamp: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and,
when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure,
lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output.
B. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.43.
C. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000K.
D. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000K.
E. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and CCT color temperature
4000K.
2.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS A.
Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.
1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure,
permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural
Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article.
2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of
luminaires and brackets by a factor of [1.1] <Insert number> to obtain the equivalent
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.
B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting
requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with
support components.
1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.
2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers:Hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication unless otherwise indicated.
3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches (65 by 130 mm),
with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws.
E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
F. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural
steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and
strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.
G. Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4-M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A.
Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.
1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for
the application and approved by manufacturer.
C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of
photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north
orientation.
3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a
dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping
plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding
system.
B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.
2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
END OF SECTION 265600